WO2017165489A1 - Antiviral agents for treating zika and dengue virus infections - Google Patents

Antiviral agents for treating zika and dengue virus infections Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2017165489A1
WO2017165489A1 PCT/US2017/023537 US2017023537W WO2017165489A1 WO 2017165489 A1 WO2017165489 A1 WO 2017165489A1 US 2017023537 W US2017023537 W US 2017023537W WO 2017165489 A1 WO2017165489 A1 WO 2017165489A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
alkyl
cycloalkyl
substituted
aryl
alkoxy
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/US2017/023537
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Raymond F. Schinazi
Franck Amblard
Bryan D. COX
Leda BASSIT
Longhu Zhou
Christina GAVEGNANO
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Emory University
Original Assignee
Emory University
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Emory University filed Critical Emory University
Priority to US16/088,017 priority Critical patent/US11963972B2/en
Publication of WO2017165489A1 publication Critical patent/WO2017165489A1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Priority to US18/603,143 priority patent/US20240216414A1/en
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/435Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • A61K31/47Quinolines; Isoquinolines
    • A61K31/47064-Aminoquinolines; 8-Aminoquinolines, e.g. chloroquine, primaquine
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/53Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with three nitrogens as the only ring hetero atoms, e.g. chlorazanil, melamine
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/63Compounds containing para-N-benzenesulfonyl-N-groups, e.g. sulfanilamide, p-nitrobenzenesulfonyl hydrazide
    • A61K31/635Compounds containing para-N-benzenesulfonyl-N-groups, e.g. sulfanilamide, p-nitrobenzenesulfonyl hydrazide having a heterocyclic ring, e.g. sulfadiazine
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/655Azo (—N=N—), diazo (=N2), azoxy (>N—O—N< or N(=O)—N<), azido (—N3) or diazoamino (—N=N—N<) compounds
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/70Carbohydrates; Sugars; Derivatives thereof
    • A61K31/7042Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings
    • A61K31/7052Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. nucleosides, nucleotides
    • A61K31/706Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. nucleosides, nucleotides containing six-membered rings with nitrogen as a ring hetero atom
    • A61K31/7064Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. nucleosides, nucleotides containing six-membered rings with nitrogen as a ring hetero atom containing condensed or non-condensed pyrimidines
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/70Carbohydrates; Sugars; Derivatives thereof
    • A61K31/7042Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings
    • A61K31/7052Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. nucleosides, nucleotides
    • A61K31/706Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. nucleosides, nucleotides containing six-membered rings with nitrogen as a ring hetero atom
    • A61K31/7064Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. nucleosides, nucleotides containing six-membered rings with nitrogen as a ring hetero atom containing condensed or non-condensed pyrimidines
    • A61K31/7068Compounds having saccharide radicals and heterocyclic rings having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. nucleosides, nucleotides containing six-membered rings with nitrogen as a ring hetero atom containing condensed or non-condensed pyrimidines having oxo groups directly attached to the pyrimidine ring, e.g. cytidine, cytidylic acid
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K45/00Medicinal preparations containing active ingredients not provided for in groups A61K31/00 - A61K41/00
    • A61K45/06Mixtures of active ingredients without chemical characterisation, e.g. antiphlogistics and cardiaca
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12Antivirals
    • A61P31/14Antivirals for RNA viruses
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02ATECHNOLOGIES FOR ADAPTATION TO CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02A50/00TECHNOLOGIES FOR ADAPTATION TO CLIMATE CHANGE in human health protection, e.g. against extreme weather
    • Y02A50/30Against vector-borne diseases, e.g. mosquito-borne, fly-borne, tick-borne or waterborne diseases whose impact is exacerbated by climate change

Definitions

  • the present invention is directed to compounds, methods and compositions for treating or preventing infections by the Zika virus.
  • the compounds include using certain small molecules, including nucleosides and monophosphate prodrugs thereof, preferably pyrimidine nucleosides, and sulfasalazine.
  • the present application discloses how to prepare nucleoside derivatives, convert them to therapeutically relevant nucleotide prodrugs, and ultimately deliver corresponding nucleotide triphosphates to the Zika virus polymerase at therapeutically-relevant concentrations.
  • Nucleoside analogs as a class have a well-established regulatory history, with more than 10 currently approved by the US Food and Drug Administration (US FDA) for treating human immunodeficiency virus (HIV), hepatitis B virus (FfBV), and herpes simplex C virus (HSV).
  • US FDA US Food and Drug Administration
  • HSV herpes simplex C virus
  • Zika Virus Zika Virus
  • Aedes genus Human case reports of clinically diagnosed ZIKV infections include self- limiting acute febrile illnesses with fever, headache, myalgia and rash.
  • Epidemiology studies point out to a widespread distribution of ZIKV in the northern half of Africa, as well as in many countries in Southeast Asia, including Malaysia, India, the Philippines, Thailand, Vietnam, Indonesia and Pakistan.
  • PAHO Pan American Health Organization
  • anti-ZIKV agents compositions including these agents, and methods of treatment using these agents.
  • present invention provides such agents, compositions and methods.
  • the present invention provides compounds, methods and compositions for treating or preventing Zika virus (ZIKV) infection in a host.
  • ZIKV Zika virus
  • Representative Zika virus strains that can be treated include ArD127707, CHI2871014, Java, MR766, NC14-02042914-3220, ZIKV Hu/Tahiti/01u/2014NIID, KU501215.1 (PRVABC59) and HS2015BA01.
  • the methods involve administering a therapeutically or prophylactically-effective amount of at least one compound as described herein to treat or prevent an infection by, or an amount sufficient to reduce the biological activity of, a ZIKV infection.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions include one or more of the compounds described herein, in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient, for treating a host with Zika virus.
  • the formulations can further include at least one further therapeutic agent.
  • Pyrimidine and purine nucleosides are more effective when they are administered in the form of monophosphate prodrugs, as the rate limiting step in forming the active triphosphate is the production of the monophosphate.
  • Sulfasalazine which has the formula: and sulfasalazine analogs can be used to treat, prevent, or reduce the biological activity of a ZIKV infection.
  • Chloroquine, and chloroquine analogs can also be used to treat, prevent, or reduce the biological activity of a ZIKV infection.
  • the compounds can be combined with one or more additional anti-Zika compounds, including entry inhibitors useful against various viral disorders, and BCX4430 (BioCryst), a viral RNA-dependent RNA polymerase (RdRp) inhibitor.
  • additional anti-Zika compounds including entry inhibitors useful against various viral disorders, and BCX4430 (BioCryst), a viral RNA-dependent RNA polymerase (RdRp) inhibitor.
  • Figure 1A provides a table of all HCV RDRP residues within 6 A of the incoming Sofosbuvir-diphosphate from crystal structure (4WTG) and their positional equivalent for JEV, DENV, and ZIKV homology model (derived from JEV) after structural alignment. Identical residues across the structures are highlighted in blue, similar residues are highlighted in green, and dissimilar residues are orange.
  • Figure IB is a 3D representation of the HCV RDRP active site showing the position of all residues near the incoming nucleotide.
  • the RDRP backbone is provided as transparent grey ribbons, the RNA primentemplate are rendered as gold cartoons, and the incoming Sofosbuvir-diphosphate is indicated.
  • the residues in the active site are colored according to the table in Figure 1 A, and residue substitutions between HCV and ZIKV are indicated.
  • Figures 2A and 2B are charts showing the results of uninfected and Zika-infected Vero cells, respectively, stained with 4G2 antibody.
  • Figures 3A-D show the results of treatment of Zika-infected Vero cells with a compound of the formula: at concentrations of 10 ⁇ , 1 ⁇ , 0.1 ⁇ and 0.01 ⁇ , respectively.
  • Figures 4A-D show the results of treatment of Zika-infected Vero cells with a compound of the formula:
  • Figures 5 A-H show the results of treatment of Zika-infected Vero cells with various compounds, all at a concentration of 10 ⁇ .
  • Figures 6A-6C are charts showing the percent inhibition of Zika virus (% inhibition) versus the concentration of sulfasalazine (SSZ, ⁇ ) ( Figure 6 A), or control 1 (Figure 6B), or in combination ( Figure 6C).
  • ZIKV has a positive-sense, single-stranded RNA genome approximately 11 kilobases in length.
  • the genome contains 5 ' and 3 ' untranslated regions flanking a single open reading frame (ORF) that encodes a polyprotein that is cleaved into three structural proteins: the capsid, premembrane/membrane, and envelope, and seven non- structural proteins (NSl, NS2A, NS2B, NS3, NS4A, 2K, NS4B and NS5).
  • ORF open reading frame
  • NS1A, NS2B, NS3, NS4A, 2K, NS4B and NS5 seven non- structural proteins.
  • NS5 possesses polymerase activity and is involved in the synthesis of double-stranded RNA from the single- stranded viral RNA genome that serves as the template.
  • ZIKV replication may be prevented through the manipulation of NS5B's polymerase activity via competitive inhibition of NS
  • Nucleoside derivatives and modified monophosphate prodrug analogs described herein show inhibitory activity against Zika virus. Therefore, the compounds can be used to treat or prevent a viral infection in a host, or reduce the biological activity of the virus.
  • the host can be a mammal, and in particular, a human, infected with Zika virus.
  • Representative Zika virus strains that can be treated include ArD 127707, CHI2871014, Java, MR766, NC14- 02042914-3220, and ZIKV Hu/Tahiti/01u/2014NIID.
  • the methods involve administering an effective amount of one or more of the nucleoside or nucleotides monophosphate prodrugs described herein.
  • compositions including one or more compounds described herein, in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient, are also disclosed.
  • the formulations include at least one compound described herein and at least one further therapeutic agent.
  • enantiomerically pure refers to a nucleotide composition that comprises at least approximately 95%, and, preferably, approximately 97%, 98%, 99% or 100%) of a single enantiomer of that nucleotide.
  • the term “substantially free of or “substantially in the absence of refers to a nucleotide composition that includes at least 85 to 90% by weight, preferably 95% to 98 % by weight, and, even more preferably, 99% to 100% by weight, of the designated enantiomer of that nucleotide.
  • the compounds described herein are substantially free of enantiomers.
  • isolated refers to a nucleotide composition that includes at least 85 to 90% by weight, preferably 95% to 98 %> by weight, and, even more preferably, 99% to 100%) by weight, of the nucleotide, the remainder comprising other chemical species or enantiomers.
  • the phosphorus atom may be chiral herein termed "P*" or "P” which means that and that it has a designation of "R” or “S” corresponding to the accepted meanings of Cahn-Ingold-Prelog rules for such assignment.
  • Prodrugs of Formula A may exist as a mixture of diastereomers due to the chirality at the phosphorus center. When chirality exists at the phosphorous center it may be wholly or partially Rp or Sp or any mixture thereof.
  • alkyl refers to a saturated straight, branched, or cyclic, primary, secondary, or tertiary hydrocarbons, including both substituted and unsubstituted alkyl groups.
  • the alkyl group can be optionally substituted with any moiety that does not otherwise interfere with the reaction or that provides an improvement in the process, including but not limited to but limited to halo, haloalkyl, hydroxyl, carboxyl, acyl, aryl, acyloxy, amino, amido, carboxyl derivatives, alkylamino, dialkylamino, arylamino, alkoxy, aryloxy, nitro, cyano, sulfonic acid, thiol, imine, sulfonyl, sulfanyl, sulfinyl, sulfamonyl, ester, carboxylic acid, amide, phosphonyl, phosphinyl, phosphoryl, phosphine, thioester, thioether, acid halide, anhydride, oxime, hydrazine, carbamate, phosphonic acid, phosphonate, either unprotected, or protected as necessary, as known
  • alkyl includes Ci-22 alkyl moieties
  • lower alkyl includes Ci- 6 alkyl moieties.
  • alkyl radical is named by replacing the suffix "-ane” with the suffix "-yl”.
  • alkenyl refers to an unsaturated, hydrocarbon radical, linear or branched, in so much as it contains one or more double bonds, and the term “lower alkenyl” includes C2-6 alkenyl moieties.
  • alkenyl group disclosed herein can be optionally substituted with any moiety that does not adversely affect the reaction process, including but not limited to but not limited to those described for substituents on alkyl moieties.
  • alkenyl groups include ethylene, methyl ethylene, isopropylidene, 1,2-ethane-diyl, 1, 1-ethane- diyl, 1,3-propane-diyl, 1,2-propane-diyl, 1,3-butane-diyl, and 1,4-butane-diyl.
  • alkynyl refers to an unsaturated, acyclic hydrocarbon radical, linear or branched, in so much as it contains one or more triple bonds, and the term “lower alkynyl” includes C2-6 alkynyl moieties.
  • the alkynyl group can be optionally substituted with any moiety that does not adversely affect the reaction process, including but not limited to those described above for alkyl moeities.
  • Non-limiting examples of suitable alkynyl groups include ethynyl, propynyl, hydroxypropynyl, butyn-l-yl, butyn-2-yl, pentyn-l-yl, pentyn-2-yl, 4- methoxypentyn-2-yl, 3-methylbutyn-l-yl, hexyn-l-yl, hexyn-2-yl, and hexyn-3-yl, 3,3- dimethylbutyn-l-yl radicals.
  • alkylamino or arylamino refers to an amino group that has one or two alkyl or aryl substituents, respectively.
  • protected refers to a group that is added to an oxygen, nitrogen, or phosphorus atom to prevent its further reaction or for other purposes.
  • oxygen and nitrogen protecting groups are known to those skilled in the art of organic synthesis, and are described, for example, in Greene et al, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, supra.
  • aryl alone or in combination, means a carbocyclic aromatic system containing one, two or three rings wherein such rings can be attached together in a pendent manner or can be fused.
  • Non-limiting examples of aryl include phenyl, biphenyl, or naphthyl, or other aromatic groups that remain after the removal of a hydrogen from an aromatic ring.
  • aryl includes both substituted and unsubstituted moieties.
  • the aryl group can be optionally substituted with any moiety that does not adversely affect the process, including but not limited to but not limited to those described above for alkyl moieties.
  • Non-limiting examples of substituted aryl include heteroarylamino, N-aryl-N-alkylamino, N- heteroarylamino-N-alkylamino, heteroaralkoxy, arylamino, aralkylamino, arylthio, monoarylamidosulfonyl, arylsulfonamido, diarylamidosulfonyl, monoaryl amidosulfonyl, arylsulfinyl, arylsulfonyl, heteroarylthio, heteroarylsulfinyl, heteroarylsulfonyl, aroyl, heteroaroyl, aralkanoyl, heteroaralkanoyl, hydroxyaralkyl, hydoxyheteroaralkyl, haloalkoxyalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, aryloxy, aralkoxy, aryloxyalkyl, saturated heterocyclyl, partially saturated hetero
  • alkaryl or “alkylaryl” refer to an alkyl group with an aryl substituent.
  • aralkyl or arylalkyl refer to an aryl group with an alkyl substituent.
  • halo includes chloro, bromo, iodo and fluoro.
  • acyl refers to a carboxylic acid ester in which the non-carbonyl moiety of the ester group is selected from straight, branched, or cyclic alkyl or lower alkyl, alkoxyalkyl, including but not limited to methoxymethyl, aralkyl, including but not limited to benzyl, aryloxyalkyl, such as phenoxymethyl, aryl, including but not limited to phenyl, optionally substituted with halogen (F, CI, Br, I), alkyl (including, but not limited to C i, C 2 , C 3 , and C 4 ), alkoxy (including but not limited to Ci, C 2 , C 3 , and C 4 ), sulfonate esters, such as alkyl or aralkyl sulphonyl, including but not limited to methanesulfonyl, mono, di or triphosphate esters, trityl or monomethoxytrityl, substituted
  • alkoxy and alkoxyalkyl embrace linear or branched oxy-containing radicals having alkyl moieties, such as methoxy radical.
  • alkoxyalkyl also embraces alkyl radicals having one or more alkoxy radicals attached to the alkyl radical, that is, to form monoalkoxyalkyl and dialkoxyalkyl radicals.
  • the "alkoxy” radicals can be further substituted with one or more halo atoms, such as fluoro, chloro or bromo, to provide "haloalkoxy" radicals.
  • radicals include fluoromethoxy, chloromethoxy, trifluoromethoxy, difluoromethoxy, trifluoroethoxy, fluoroethoxy, tetrafluoroethoxy, pentafluoroethoxy, and fluoropropoxy.
  • alkylamino denotes “monoalkylamino” and “dialkylamino” containing one or two alkyl radicals, respectively, attached to an amino radical.
  • arylamino denotes “monoarylamino” and “diarylamino” containing one or two aryl radicals, respectively, attached to an amino radical.
  • aralkylamino embraces aralkyl radicals attached to an amino radical.
  • aralkylamino denotes “monoaralkylamino” and “diaralkylamino” containing one or two aralkyl radicals, respectively, attached to an amino radical.
  • aralkylamino further denotes "monoaralkyl monoalkylamino" containing one aralkyl radical and one alkyl radical attached to an amino radical.
  • heteroatom refers to oxygen, sulfur, nitrogen and phosphorus.
  • heteroaryl or “heteroaromatic,” as used herein, refer to an aromatic that includes at least one sulfur, oxygen, nitrogen or phosphorus in the aromatic ring.
  • heterocyclic refers to a nonaromatic cyclic group wherein there is at least one heteroatom, such as oxygen, sulfur, nitrogen, or phosphorus in the ring.
  • heteroaryl and heterocyclic groups include furyl, furanyl, pyridyl, pyrimidyl, thienyl, isothiazolyl, imidazolyl, tetrazolyl, pyrazinyl, benzofuranyl, benzothiophenyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, benzothienyl, isobenzofuryl, pyrazolyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, benzimidazolyl, purinyl, carbazolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, 1,2,4- thiadiazolyl, isooxazolyl, pyrrolyl, quinazolinyl, cinnolinyl, phthalazinyl, xanthinyl, hypoxanthinyl, thiophene, furan, pyrrole, isopyrrole, pyrazole, imidazo
  • the heteroaromatic group can be optionally substituted as described above for aryl.
  • the heterocyclic or heteroaromatic group can be optionally substituted with one or more substituents selected from the group consisting of halogen, haloalkyl, alkyl, alkoxy, hydroxy, carboxyl derivatives, amido, amino, alkylamino, and dialkylamino.
  • the heteroaromatic can be partially or totally hydrogenated as desired.
  • dihydropyridine can be used in place of pyridine. Functional oxygen and nitrogen groups on the heterocyclic or heteroaryl group can be protected as necessary or desired.
  • Suitable protecting groups are well known to those skilled in the art, and include trimethylsilyl, dimethylhexylsilyl, t-butyldimethylsilyl, and t- butyldiphenylsilyl, trityl or substituted trityl, alkyl groups, acyl groups such as acetyl and propionyl, methanesulfonyl, and p-toluenelsulfonyl.
  • the heterocyclic or heteroaromatic group can be substituted with any moiety that does not adversely affect the reaction, including but not limited to but not limited to those described above for aryl.
  • the term "host,” as used herein, refers to a unicellular or multicellular organism in which the virus can replicate, including but not limited to cell lines and animals, and, preferably, humans. Alternatively, the host can be carrying a part of the viral genome, whose replication or function can be altered by the compounds of the present invention.
  • the term host specifically refers to infected cells, cells transfected with all or part of the viral genome and animals, in particular, primates (including but not limited to chimpanzees) and humans. In most animal applications of the present invention, the host is a human patient. Veterinary applications, in certain indications, however, are clearly contemplated by the present invention (such as for use in treating chimpanzees).
  • peptide refers to various natural or synthetic compounds containing two to one hundred amino acids linked by the carboxyl group of one amino acid to the amino group of another.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug is used throughout the specification to describe any pharmaceutically acceptable form (such as an ester, phosphate ester, salt of an ester or a related group) of a nucleotide compound which, upon administration to a patient, provides the nucleotide monophosphate compound.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable salts include those derived from pharmaceutically acceptable inorganic or organic bases and acids. Suitable salts include those derived from alkali metals such as potassium and sodium, alkaline earth metals such as calcium and magnesium, among numerous other acids well known in the pharmaceutical art.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable prodrugs refer to a compound that is metabolized, for example hydrolyzed or oxidized, in the host to form the compound of the present invention.
  • prodrugs include compounds that have biologically labile protecting groups on functional moieties of the active compound.
  • Prodrugs include compounds that can be oxidized, reduced, aminated, deaminated, hydroxylated, dehydroxylated, hydrolyzed, dehydrolyzed, alkylated, dealkylated, acylated, deacylated, phosphorylated, or dephosphorylated to produce the active compound.
  • the prodrug forms of the compounds of this invention can possess antiviral activity, can be metabolized to form a compound that exhibits such activity, or both.
  • Prodrugs also include amino acid esters of the disclosed nucleosides (see, e.g., European Patent Specification No. 99493, the text of which is incorporated by reference, which describes amino acid esters of acyclovir, specifically the glycine and alanine esters which show improved water-solubility compared with acyclovir itself, and US Pat. No. 4,957,924 (Beauchamp), which discloses the valine ester of acyclovir, characterized by side- chain branching adjacent to the a-carbon atom, which showed improved bioavailability after oral administration compared with the alanine and glycine esters).
  • a process for preparing such amino acid esters is disclosed in US Pat. No.
  • a functional equivalent of the amino acid can be used (e.g. , an acid halide such as the acid chloride, or an acid anhydride).
  • an acid halide such as the acid chloride, or an acid anhydride.
  • the compounds have one of the following formulae:
  • X 1 is H, Ci-Cealkyl, C3-8 cycloalkyl, C3-8 cycloalkyl-Ci-6 alkyl, Ci-C 6 haloalkyl, Ci- C 6 alkoxy, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, COR 1 , or COOR 1 ;
  • X 2 is hydrogen, Ci-C 6 alkyl, C3-8 cycloalkyl, C3-8 cycloalkyl-Ci-6 alkyl, Ci- C 6 haloalkyl, Ci-C 6 alkoxy, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, -OH, COR 1 , OCOR 1 , COOR 1 or OCOOR 1 ; each X 3 and X 4 is independently H, Ci-6 alkyl, C 2 - 6 alkenyl, C 2 - 6 alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, halogen (F, CI, Br, I), H 2 , OH, SH, CN, or N0 2;
  • Y 1 and Y 2 are, independently, N, or C-X ,
  • R 1 is independently CH 2 -0(CO)-X 5 ; CH 2 -0(CO)0-X 5 , Ci -20 alkyl, the carbon chain derived from a fatty alcohol or Ci -2 o alkyl substituted with a Ci-C 6 alkyl, Ci-C 6 alkoxy, di(Ci- C 6 alkyl)-amino, C3- 10 cycloalkyl, C3- 10 cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl; wherein the substituents are C 1 -5 alkyl, or C 1 -5 alkyl substituted with a Ci-C 6 alkyl, Ci-C 6 alkoxy, di(Ci-C 6 alkyl)-amino, C3-10 cycloalkyl, or C3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl;
  • X 5 is independently, Ci -2 o alkyl, the carbon chain derived from a fatty alcohol or Ci -2 o alkyl substituted with a Ci- 6 alkyl, alkoxy, C3- 10 cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl; wherein the substituents are C i- 6 alkyl, or Ci-6 alkyl substituted with a Ci- 6 alkyl, Ci-6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, or C3- 10 cycloalkyl,
  • W is CL 2 or CL 2 CL 2 , wherein L independently is selected from the group consisting of H, Ci-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, and C2-6 alkynyl, wherein Ci-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, and C2-6 alkynyl can each optionally contain one or more heteroatoms;
  • D is H, -QC R 1 , -CCC OR 1 , -C(0)N(R 1 ) 2 , -C ⁇ SR 1 , -0(0)8(0) ⁇ , -C ⁇ SOzR 1 , - SOR 1 , -S(0) 2 R 1 , -S(0) 2 N(R 1 ) 2 , a diphosphate ester, a triphosphate ester, a phosphonate, a lipid, or stabilized phosphate prodrug;
  • R 1 is, independently, -CH 2 -0(CO)-X 5 ; -CH 2 -0(CO)0-X 5 , Ci -20 alkyl, the carbon chain derived from a fatty alcohol or Ci -2 o alkyl substituted with a Ci-C 6 alkyl, alkoxy, di(Ci-C 6 alkyl)-amino, C3-10 cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl; wherein the substituents are Ci- 6 alkyl, or Ci-6 alkyl substituted with a Ci-C 6 alkyl, Ci-C 6 alkoxy, di(Ci-C 6 alkyl)-amino, or C3-10 cycloalky;
  • X 5 is independently, Ci -2 o alkyl, the carbon chain derived from a fatty alcohol or Ci -2 o alkyl substituted with a Ci-C 6 alkyl, alkoxy, C3-10 cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl; wherein the substituents are Ci- 6 alkyl, or Ci-6 alkyl substituted with a Ci-C 6 alkyl, Ci-C 6 alkoxy, di(Ci-C 6 alkyl)-amino, or C3-10 cycloalkyl;
  • R' R" , R , R J , R°, R° , and R' are independently selected from the group consisting of H, F, CI, Br, I, OH, SH, H 2 , HOH, HNH 2 , N 3 , C(0)OH, CN, CH 2 OH, C(0) H 2 , C(S) H 2 , C(0)OR, R, OR, SR, SSR, NHR, and NR 2 ; with the proviso that there are not two NH 2 , OH, and/or SH moieties on the same carbon atom; R 5 and R 6 can come together to form a ring
  • the compounds are of Formula A. In another embodiment, the compounds are of Formula B. In one embodiment, A is O.
  • R 4 and R 7 are both H.
  • R 6 or R 6 is OH.
  • X 2 is -OH, OCOR 1 , or OCOOR 1 .
  • R 5 and R 5 are methyl and OH.
  • R 5 and R 5 are methyl and F.
  • R 5 and R 5 are CI and F.
  • R 5 and R 5 are Br and F.
  • R 5 and R 5 are CI and CI.
  • R 5 and R 5 are Br and Br.
  • R 5 and R 5 are F and F.
  • the compounds are of one of the following formulae:
  • X 1 is H, Ci-Cealkyl, C3-8 cycloalkyl, C3-8 cycloalkyl-Ci-6 alkyl, Ci-C 6 haloalkyl, Ci- C 6 alkoxy, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, COR 1 , or COOR 1 ;
  • X 2 is hydrogen, Ci-C 6 alkyl, C3-8 cycloalkyl, C3-8 cycloalkyl-Ci-6 alkyl, Ci- C 6 haloalkyl, Ci-C 6 alkoxy, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, -OH, COR 1 , OCOR 1 , COOR 1 or OCOOR 1 ; each X 3 and X 4 is independently H, Ci-6 alkyl, C 2 - 6 alkenyl, C 2 - 6 alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, halogen (F, CI, Br, I), H 2 , OH, SH, CN, or N0 2;
  • Y 1 and Y 2 are, independently, N, or C-X ,
  • R 1 is independently CH 2 -0(CO)-X 5 ; CH 2 -0(CO)0-X 5 , Ci -20 alkyl, the carbon chain derived from a fatty alcohol or Ci -2 o alkyl substituted with a Ci-C 6 alkyl, Ci-C 6 alkoxy, di(Ci- C 6 alkyl)-amino, C3- 10 cycloalkyl, C3- 10 cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl; wherein the substituents are C 1 -5 alkyl, or C 1 -5 alkyl substituted with a Ci-C 6 alkyl, Ci-C 6 alkoxy, di(Ci-C 6 alkyl)-amino, C3-10 cycloalkyl, or C3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl; X 5 is independently, C 1-20 alkyl, the carbon chain derived from
  • Y is O or S
  • Z is selected from the group consisting of CL 2 , CL 2 CL 2 , CL 2 OCL 2 , CL 2 SCL 2 , CL 2 0, OCL 2 and CL 2 HCL 2 , wherein L independently is selected from the group consisting of H, F, Ci-6 alkyl, C 2 - 6 alkenyl, and C 2 - 6 alkynyl, wherein Ci_6 alkyl, C 2 - 6 alkenyl, and C 2 - 6 alkynyl can each optionally contain one or more heteroatoms;
  • R 4' , R 5 , R 5 , R 6 , R 6' , and R 7' are independently selected from the group consisting of H, F, CI, Br, I, OH, SH, H 2 , HOH, HNH 2 , N 3 , C(0)OH, CN, CH 2 OH, C(0) H 2 , C(S) H 2 , C(0)OR, R, OR, SR, SSR, HR, and NR 2 ;
  • R 5 and R 6 can come together to form a ring wherein when A is O or S, R 7 cannot be OH, SH, H 2 , NHOH, NHNH 2 , OR, SR, SSR, NHR, or NR 2 , and R is independently a Ci- 6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, and C2-6 alkynyl, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, or arylalkyl, wherein the groups are optionally substituted with one or more substituents as defined above, 2 4 is selected from the group consisting of OR 15 , , and fatty alcohols,
  • R 15 is selected from the group consisting of H, Li, Na, K, phenyl and pyridinyl; wherein phenyl and pyridinyl are optionally substituted with one to three substituents independently selected from the group consisting of (CH 2 )o-6C0 2 R 16 and (CH 2 )o- 6 CON(R 16 ) 2 ;
  • R 17 is selected from those groups occurring in natural L-amino acids, Ci- 6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C 2- 6 alkynyl, C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, or arylalkyl, wherein the groups are optionally substituted with one or more substituents as defined above,
  • R 18 is H, Ci-20 alkyl, the carbon chain derived from a fatty alcohol or Ci-20 alkyl substituted with a Ci-C 6 alkyl, Ci-C 6 alkoxy, di(Ci-C 6 alkyl)-amino, C 3- io cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl; wherein the substituents are C1-5 alkyl, or C1-5 alkyl substituted with a Ci-C 6 alkyl, Ci-C 6 alkoxy, di(Ci-C 6 alkyl)-amino, C 3- io cycloalkyl, or cycloalkyl;
  • R 2 and R 3 are independently selected from the group consisting of:
  • R 8 is H, Li, Na, K, Ci-20 alkyl, C 3 - 6 cycloalkyl, Ci-6 haloalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, optionally substituted with one to three substituents independently selected from the group consisting of Ci- 6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, Ci-6 alkoxy, (CH 2 )o-6C02R 9a , halogen, Ci -6 haloalkyl, -N(R 9a ) 2 , Ci -6 acylamino, -NHS0 2 Ci -6 alkyl, -S0 2 N(R 9a ) 2 , -S0 2 Ci -6
  • R 9a is independently H, C 1-20 alkyl, the carbon chain derived from a fatty alcohol or Ci-20 alkyl substituted with a Ci- 6 alkyl, Ci_6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, C3-10 cycloalkyl, C 3 - 10 cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl; wherein the substituents are C 1 -5 alkyl, or C 1 -5 alkyl substituted with a Ci- 6 alkyl, Ci-6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, C 3- io cycloalkyl, or C 3- io cycloalkyl alkyl;
  • R lua and R 1UB are:
  • R 10a is H and R 10b and R 12 together are (CH 2 ) 2-4 to form a ring that includes the adjoining N and C atoms;
  • R 10a and R 10b both are Ci -6 alkyl
  • R 10a is H and R 10b is H, CH 3 , CH 2 CH 3 , CH(CH 3 ) 2 , CH 2 CH(CH 3 ) 2 , CH(CH 3 )CH 2 CH 3 , CH 2 Ph, CH 2 -indol-3-yl, -CH 2 CH 2 SCH 3 , CH 2 C0 2 H, CH 2 C(0) H 2 , CH 2 CH 2 COOH, CH 2 CH 2 C(0) H 2 , CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 H 2 -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 HC( H) H 2 , CH 2 - imidazol-4-yl, CH 2 OH, CH(OH)CH 3 , CH 2 ((4'-OH)-Ph), CH 2 SH, or C 3- i 0 cycloalkyl; p is 0 to 2; r is 1 to 6; n is 4 or 5; m is 0 to 3;
  • R 11 is H, Ci-io alkyl, or C 1-10 alkyl substituted with a Ci- 6 alkyl, Ci_6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, C 3-10 cycloalkyl, C 3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl; wherein the substituents are C 1-5 alkyl, or C 1-5 alkyl substituted with a Ci- 6 alkyl, Ci_6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, C 3-10 cycloalkyl, or C 3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl;
  • R 12 is H or Ci-3 alkyl, or R 10a , or R 10b and R 12 together are (CH 2 ) 2-4 so as to form a ring that includes the adjoining N and C atoms;
  • an O attached lipid including a phospholipid, an N or O attached peptide, an O attached cholesterol, or an O attached phytosterol
  • R 2 and R 3 can come together to form a ring
  • R 9b is -OR 9a or -N(R 9a ) 2 ;
  • R 9c is H or Ci-6 acyl;
  • R and R can come together to form a ring
  • R is H, Ci_
  • (g) is selected from the group consisting of H, Ci-io alkyl, C 1-10 alkyl substituted with a Ci- 6 alkyl, Ci_6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, C - io cycloalkyl, C 3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl moiety; wherein the substituents are C 1-5 alkyl, or C 1-5 alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, Ci_6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, C 3-10 cycloalkyl, or C 3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl;
  • R 2 and R 3 can come together to form a ring
  • R 14 is:
  • R 14 is H, CH 3 , CH 2 CH 3 , CH(CH 3 ) 2 , CH 2 CH(CH 3 ) 2 , CH(CH 3 )CH 2 CH 3 , CH 2 Ph, CH 2 -indol-3-yl, -CH 2 CH 2 SCH 3 , CH 2 C0 2 H, CH 2 C(0) H 2 , CH 2 CH 2 COOH, CH 2 CH 2 C(0) H 2 , CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 H 2 , CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 HC( H)NH 2 , CH 2 -imidazol-4-yl, CH 2 OH, CH(OH)CH 3 , CH 2 ((4'-OH)-Ph), CH 2 SH, or C 3- i 0 cycloalkyl; p is 0 to 2; r is 1 to 6; m is 0 to 3
  • Q 1 is R 9a , O, or S
  • Q 2 is Ci-io alkyl, Ci_6 hydroxyalkyl, aryl and aryl-Ci- alkyl, heteroaryl and heteroaryl- Ci- alkyl, said aryl and heteroaryl groups optionally substituted with a group selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, Ci-io alkyl, Ci_6 alkoxy, fluoro, and chloro;
  • R 11 is H, Ci-io alkyl, Ci-io alkyl substituted with a Ci- 6 alkyl, Ci_6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, C -io cycloalkyl, C -io cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl moiety; wherein the substituents are C i -5 alkyl, or Ci-5 alkyl substituted with a Ci- 6 alkyl, Ci_6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, C -io cycloalkyl, or C -io cycloalkyl alkyl;
  • R is H or Ci- alkyl, or R and R together are (CH 2 ) 2-4 so as to form a ring that includes the adjoining N and C atoms;
  • R 2 and R 3 can come together to form a ring selected from the group consisting of
  • R is O or H
  • R 21 is selected from the group consisting of H, C i -2 o alkyl, Ci -2 o alkenyl, the carbon chain derived from a fatty acid, and C i -2 o alkyl substituted with a Ci- 6 alkyl, Ci_6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, C -io cycloalkyl, C -io cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl; wherein the substituents are C 1-5 alkyl, or Ci-5 alkyl substituted with a Ci- 6 alkyl, Ci-6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, C -io cycloalkyl, or C -io cycloalkyl alkyl, and (j) R 2 is a monophosphate ester or a diphosphate ester when R 3
  • the compounds are of Formula A. In another embodiment, the compounds are of Formula B. In another embodiment, the sugar is of Formula III.
  • R 2 is OR 8 , where R 8 is aryl, optionally substituted with one to three substituents independently selected from the group consisting of Ci- 6 alkyl, C 2 -6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, Ci -6 alkoxy, (CH 2 ) 0 -6CO 2 R 9a , halogen, Ci -6 haloalkyl, -N(R 9a ) 2 , Ci -6 acylamino, - HS0 2 Ci -6 alkyl, -S0 2 N(R 9a ) 2 , -S0 2 Ci -6 alkyl, COR 9b , nitro, cyano and
  • R 3 In one embodiment, A is O.
  • R 4 and R 7 are both H.
  • R 6 or R 6 is OH.
  • X 2 is -OH, OCOR 1 , or OCOOR 1 .
  • R and R are methyl and OH.
  • R 5 and R 5 are methyl and F.
  • R 5 and R 5 are CI and F.
  • R 5 and R 5 are Br and F. In one embodiment, R 5 and R 5 , are CI and CI. In one embodiment, R 5 and R 5 , are Br and Br. In one embodiment, R 5 and R 5 , are F and F.
  • Specific active compounds include the following:
  • the compound has the formula:
  • the compounds are of one of the following formulae:
  • X 1 is H, Ci-Cealkyl, C3-8 cycloalkyl, C3-8 cycloalkyl-Ci-6 alkyl, Ci-C 6 haloalkyl, Ci- C 6 alkoxy, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, COR 1 , or COOR 1 ;
  • X 2 is hydrogen, Ci-C 6 alkyl, C3-8 cycloalkyl, C3-8 cycloalkyl-Ci-6 alkyl, Ci- C 6 haloalkyl, Ci-C 6 alkoxy, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, -OH, COR 1 , OCOR 1 , COOR 1 or OCOOR 1 ; each X 3 and X 4 is independently H, Ci-6 alkyl, C 2 - 6 alkenyl, C 2 - 6 alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, halogen (F, CI, Br, I), H 2 , OH, SH, CN, or N0 2;
  • Y 1 and Y 2 are, independently, N, or C-X ,
  • R 1 is independently CH 2 -0(CO)-X 5 ; CH 2 -0(CO)0-X 5 , Ci -20 alkyl, the carbon chain derived from a fatty alcohol or Ci -2 o alkyl substituted with a Ci-C 6 alkyl, Ci-C 6 alkoxy, di(Ci- C 6 alkyl)-amino, C3- 10 cycloalkyl, C3- 10 cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl; wherein the substituents are C 1 -5 alkyl, or C 1 -5 alkyl substituted with a Ci-C 6 alkyl, Ci-C 6 alkoxy, di(Ci-C 6 alkyl)-amino, C3-10 cycloalkyl, or C3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl;
  • X 5 is independently, Ci -2 o alkyl, the carbon chain derived from a fatty alcohol or Ci -2 o alkyl substituted with a Ci- 6 alkyl, alkoxy, C3- 10 cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl; wherein the substituents are C i- 6 alkyl, or Ci-6 alkyl substituted with a Ci- 6 alkyl, Ci-6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, or C3- 10 cycloalkyl, and
  • D is H, C(0)R 1 , C(0)OR 1 , diphosphate ester, or triphosphate ester;
  • R 1 is independently C 1-20 alkyl, the carbon chain derived from a fatty alcohol or C 1-20 alkyl substituted with a Ci- 6 alkyl, Ci_6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, C 3-10 cycloalkyl, C 3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl; wherein the substituents are C 1-5 alkyl, or C 1-5 alkyl substituted with a Ci- 6 alkyl, Ci_6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, C 3-10 cycloalkyl, or C 3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl;
  • W is CL 2 or CL 2 CL 2 , wherein L independently is selected from the group consisting of H, Ci-6 alkyl, C 2 - 6 alkenyl, and C 2 -6 alkynyl, wherein Ci-6 alkyl, C 2 - 6 alkenyl, and C 2 - 6 alkynyl can each optionally contain one or more heteroatoms;
  • A, R 2 , R 3 , Y, Z, R 4 ', R 5 , R 6 ', and R r are as defined above; wherein, when A is O or S, R 7 cannot be OH, SH, H 2 , HOH, HNH 2 , OR, SR, SSR, HR, or R 2 , wherein R is independently a Ci-C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, or arylalkyl, wherein the groups can optionally be substituted with one or more substituents as defined above, or one of the general Formulas (VII), (VIII), (IX), and (X):
  • D is H, C(0)R 1 , C(0)OR 1 , diphosphate ester, or triphosphate ester; V is, individually, S or Se;
  • R 1 is independently C 1 -20 alkyl, the carbon chain derived from a fatty alcohol or C 1-20 alkyl substituted with a Ci-C 6 alkyl, Ci-C 6 alkoxy, di(Ci-C 6 alkyl)-amino, C 3-10 cycloalkyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl; wherein the substituents are C 1-5 alkyl, or C 1-5 alkyl substituted with a Ci-C 6 alkyl, Ci-C 6 alkoxy, di(Ci-C 6 alkyl)-amino, C 3-10 cycloalkyl, or C 3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl; wherein D cannot be H or acyl, or one of the general formulas (XI), ( ⁇ ), (XIII), and (XIV):
  • V is, individually, S or Se
  • R 2 , R 3 , Y, and Z are as defined above, or the general Formula (XV):
  • R z , R and Y are as defined above;
  • R 30 is selected from the group consisting of C 1 -20 alkyl, C2-20 alkyl, C2-20 alkenyl, C2-20 alkynyl, C 3 -10 cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, and alkylaryl. or one of the general Formulas (XVI) or (XVII):
  • R 2 , R 3 , Z, and Y are as defined above:
  • Y 2 is O, S, Se, or R:
  • R is, independently, a Ci-C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl , C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, C3-C 6 cycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, or aiylalkyl, wherein the groups are optionally substituted with one or more substituents as defined above,
  • R 31 , R 31 ' and R 32 are H, C3 ⁇ 4, or CH 2 OR 33 ; and R is H or Ci-C 6 acyl, or the general Formula (XVIII)
  • D, W, R 4' , R 5 , R 5 , R 6 , and R 6' are as defined above;
  • R 2 , R 3 , R 4' , R 5 , R 5 , R 6 , and R 6' , Y and Z are as defined above,
  • R 19 is H, F, CI, Br, I, N 3 , C(0)OH, CN, C(0)NH 2 , C(S)NH 2 , C(0)OR, or R, and wherein R is independently Ci-C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, C3-C 6 cycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, or arylalkyl, wherein the groups are optionally substituted with one or more substituents as defined above, or one of the Formulas (XX), (XXI), or (XXII):
  • R 4' , R 5 , R 5 , R 6 , Y, and R 7 ' are as defined above;
  • R 34 is Ci-C 6 alkyl; M is O, S, or R; wherein R is, independently, Ci-C 6 alkyl, C 2 -6 alkenyl, C 2 -6 alkynyl, C3-C 6 cycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, or arylalkyl, wherein the groups are optionally substituted with one or more substituents as defined above, or one of the Formulas (XXIII) or (XXIV):
  • R 4' , R 5 , R 5 , R 6 , Y, R 34 , and R 7 ' are as defined above,
  • R 35 is H, Ci-10 alkyl, Ci-10 alkyl substituted with a Ci- 6 alkyl, Ci-6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, C3-10 cycloalkyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl moiety; wherein the substituents are C 1-5 alkyl, or Ci-5 alkyl substituted with a Ci- 6 alkyl, Ci_6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, C 3-10 cycloalkyl, or C3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl; and
  • R 22 is H, CH 3 , CH 2 CH 3 , CH(CH 3 ) 2 , CH 2 CH(CH 3 ) 2 , CH(CH 3 )CH 2 CH 3 , CH 2 Ph, CH 2 - indol-3-yl, -CH 2 CH 2 SCH 3 , CH 2 C0 2 H, CH 2 C(0)NH 2 , CH 2 CH 2 COOH, CH 2 CH 2 C(0)NH 2 , CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 NH 2 , CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 NHC(NH)NH 2 , CH 2 -imidazol-4-yl, CH 2 OH, CH(OH)CH 3 , CH 2 ((4'-OH)-Ph), CH 2 SH, or C 3-6 cycloalkyl, or one of the Formulas (XXV) or (XXVI):
  • R 4' , R 5 , R 5 , R 6 , Y, R 7' , R 22 R 34 and R 35 are as defined above.
  • the compound is sulfasalazine or a sulfasalazine analog:
  • Sulfasalazine analogs include, but are not limited to, Ipsalazide, Balsalazine, and those disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 4,849,416, U.S. Patent No. 7, 151,095. These analogs generally have the formula:
  • X is pyridyl, pheny, phenyl- substituted by lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, halogi roxy, or nitro, furyl, pyrrolyl, quinolyl, pyrimidyl, thienyl or imidazolyl;
  • R, Ri and R 2 are independently H, Ci_6 alkyl, Ci_6 aminoalkyl or
  • A is H, Ci-6 alkyl, Ci_6 aminoalkyl, amino, alkoxy, halo or CF 3 ; and n is 0 to 4.
  • pyridyl means 2-pyridyl, 3 -pyridyl and 4-pyridyl; halo means chloro, bromo, iodo, and fluoro groups; and amino means amino or an amino derivative such as -
  • the compound is chloroquine or a chloroquine analog.
  • Chloroquine (7-chloro-4-(4-diethylamino- 1 -methylbutylamino)quinolone),
  • Hydroxychloroquine (7-chloro-4-(4-ethyl-(2-hydroxyethyl)-amino- 1 - methylbutylamino)quinolone), and amodiaquine are also effective anti-ZIKA agents, as are analogs of chloroquine.
  • Examples of such analogs include those described in U.S. Patent No. 6,479,504 and Solomon, V.R., et al. Design and synthesis of chloroquine analogs with anti- breast cancer property. Eur J Med Chem 45 (2010) 3916-3923.
  • Representative chloroquine analogs include, but are not limited to:
  • the compounds can exist in the form of diastereomeric mixtures, enantiomers and the like.
  • Enantiomers of chloroquine and chloroquine analogs can be isolated, for example, according to the procedure of Stalcup, A. M. et al. (1996), Analytical Chemistry 68:2248-50.
  • the compound is an entry inhibitor.
  • entry and/or adhesion factors among which DC-SIGN, AXL, TYR03, and to a lesser extent, TIM-1, permit ZIKV entry, with a major role for the TAM receptor AXL (Hamel et al, "Biology of ZIKA Virus Infection in Human Skin Cells," Journal of Virology, March 2016, volume 90, issue 6).
  • Entry inhibitors for HIV infection which work through inhibition of DC-SIGN include those disclosed in Berzi, et al, (2012) A glycomimetic compound inhibits DC-SIGN- mediated HIV infection in cellular and cervical explant models. AIDS 26, 127-137, and in Mangold,et al, (2012) Quinoxalinoneinhibitors of the lectin DC-SIGN. Chem. Sci. 3, 772- 777.
  • HCV Hepatitis C Virus Entry
  • the compounds described herein may have asymmetric centers and occur as racemates, racemic mixtures, individual diastereomers or enantiomers, with all isomeric forms being included in the present invention.
  • Compounds of the present invention having a chiral center can exist in and be isolated in optically active and racemic forms. Some compounds can exhibit polymorphism.
  • the present invention encompasses racemic, optically -active, polymorphic, or stereoisomeric forms, or mixtures thereof, of a compound of the invention, which possess the useful properties described herein.
  • optically active forms can be prepared by, for example, resolution of the racemic form by recrystallization techniques, by synthesis from optically-active starting materials, by chiral synthesis, or by chromatographic separation using a chiral stationary phase or by enzymatic resolution.
  • Optically active forms of the compounds can be prepared using any method known in the art, including but not limited to by resolution of the racemic form by recrystallization techniques, by synthesis from optically-active starting materials, by chiral synthesis, or by chromatographic separation using a chiral stationary phase.
  • Examples of methods to obtain optically active materials include at least the following. i) physical separation of crystals: a technique whereby macroscopic crystals of the individual enantiomers are manually separated. This technique can be used if crystals of the separate enantiomers exist, i.e., the material is a conglomerate, and the crystals are visually distinct; ii) simultaneous crystallization: a technique whereby the individual enantiomers are separately crystallized from a solution of the racemate, possible only if the latter is a conglomerate in the solid state; iii) enzymatic resolutions: a technique whereby partial or complete separation of a racemate by virtue of differing rates of reaction for the enantiomers with an enzyme; iv) enzymatic asymmetric synthesis: a synthetic technique whereby at least one step of the synthesis uses an enzymatic reaction to obtain an enantiomerically pure or enriched synthetic precursor of the desired enantiomer; v) chemical asymmetric synthesis:
  • first- and second-order asymmetric transformations a technique whereby diastereomers from the racemate equilibrate to yield a preponderance in solution of the diastereomer from the desired enantiomer or where preferential crystallization of the diastereomer from the desired enantiomer perturbs the equilibrium such that eventually in principle all the material is converted to the crystalline diastereomer from the desired enantiomer.
  • kinetic resolutions this technique refers to the achievement of partial or complete resolution of a racemate (or of a further resolution of a partially resolved compound) by virtue of unequal reaction rates of the enantiomers with a chiral, non-racemic reagent or catalyst under kinetic conditions; ix) enantiospecific synthesis from non-racemic precursors: a synthetic technique whereby the desired enantiomer is obtained from non-chiral starting materials and where the stereochemical integrity is not or is only minimally compromised over the course of the synthesis; x) chiral liquid chromatography: a technique whereby the enantiomers of a racemate are separated in a liquid mobile phase by virtue of their differing interactions with a stationary phase (including but not limited to via chiral HPLC).
  • the stationary phase can be made of chiral material or the mobile phase can contain an additional chiral material to provoke the differing interactions;
  • chiral gas chromatography a technique whereby the racemate is volatilized and enantiomers are separated by virtue of their differing interactions in the gaseous mobile phase with a column containing a fixed non-racemic chiral adsorbent phase;
  • extraction with chiral solvents a technique whereby the enantiomers are separated by virtue of preferential dissolution of one enantiomer into a particular chiral solvent;
  • xiii) transport across chiral membranes a technique whereby a racemate is placed in contact with a thin membrane barrier.
  • the barrier typically separates two miscible fluids, one containing the racemate, and a driving force such as concentration or pressure differential causes preferential transport across the membrane barrier. Separation occurs as a result of the non-racemic chiral nature of the membrane that allows only one enantiomer of the racemate to pass through.
  • Chiral chromatography including but not limited to simulated moving bed chromatography, is used in one embodiment.
  • a wide variety of chiral stationary phases are commercially available.
  • Suitable inorganic salts can also be formed, including but not limited to, sulfate, nitrate, bicarbonate and carbonate salts.
  • salts can be obtained using standard procedures well known in the art, for example by reacting a sufficiently basic compound such as an amine with a suitable acid, affording a physiologically acceptable anion.
  • a sufficiently basic compound such as an amine
  • suitable acid affording a physiologically acceptable anion.
  • Alkali metal e.g., sodium, potassium or lithium
  • alkaline earth metal e.g. , calcium
  • nucleotide prodrugs described herein can be administered to additionally increase the activity, bioavailability, stability or otherwise alter the properties of the nucleotide monophosphate.
  • nucleotide prodrug ligands A number of nucleotide prodrug ligands are known. In general, alkylation, acylation or other lipophilic modification of the monophosphate or other anolog of the nucleoside will increase the stability of the nucleotide.
  • substituent groups that can replace one or more hydrogens on the monophosphate moiety are alkyl, aryl, steroids, carbohydrates, including but not limited to sugars, 1,2-diacylglycerol and alcohols. Many are described in R. Jones & N. Bischofberger, Antiviral Research, 1995, 27, 1-17 and S.J. Hecker & M.D. Erion, J. Med. Chem., 2008, 51, 2328-2345. Any of these can be used in combination with the disclosed nucleotides to achieve a desired effect.
  • the active nucleotide can also be provided as a 5'-phosphoether lipid as disclosed in the following references, which are incorporated by reference: Kucera, L.S., N. Iyer, E. Leake, A. Raben, Modest E.K., D.L.W., and C. Piantadosi, "Novel membrane -interactive ether lipid analogs that inhibit infectious HIV-1 production and induce defective virus formation," AIDS Res. Hum. Retroviruses, 1990, 6, 491-501; Piantadosi, C, J. Marasco C.J., S.L. Morris-Natschke, K.L. Meyer, F. Gumus, J.R. Surles, K.S. Ishaq, L.S. Kucera, N.
  • Nonlimiting examples of US patents that disclose suitable lipophilic substituents that can be covalently incorporated into the nucleoside, preferably at R 2 and/or R 3 position of the nucleotides described herein, or lipophilic preparations, include US Pat. Nos.
  • Hosts including but not limited to humans, infected with Zika virus or a gene fragment thereof, can be treated by administering to the patient an effective amount of the active compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug or salt thereof in the presence of a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent.
  • the active materials can be administered by any appropriate route, for example, orally, parenterally, intravenously, intradermally, subcutaneously, or topically, in liquid or solid form.
  • the compounds of the invention can be employed together with at least one other antiviral agent.
  • Representative antiviral agents include entry inhibitors, reverse transcriptase inhibitors, protease inhibitors, and immune-based therapeutic agents.
  • the active compound or its prodrug or pharmaceutically acceptable salt when used to treat or prevent Zika virus infection, can be administered in combination or alternation with another antiviral agent, including, but not limited to, those of the formulae above.
  • another antiviral agent including, but not limited to, those of the formulae above.
  • effective dosages of two or more agents are administered together, whereas during alternation therapy, an effective dosage of each agent is administered serially.
  • the dosage will depend on absorption, inactivation and excretion rates of the drug, as well as other factors known to those of skill in the art. It is to be noted that dosage values will also vary with the severity of the condition to be alleviated. It is to be further understood that for any particular subject, specific dosage regimens and schedules should be adjusted over time according to the individual need and the professional judgment of the person administering or supervising the administration of the compositions.
  • Hosts including but not limited to humans, infected with ZIKV can be treated by administering to the patient an effective amount of the active compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug or salt thereof in the presence of a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent.
  • the active materials can be administered by any appropriate route, for example, orally, parenterally, intravenously, intradermally, subcutaneously, or topically, in liquid or solid form.
  • a preferred dose of the compound for will be in the range of between about 0.01 and about 10 mg/kg, more generally, between about 0.1 and 5 mg/kg, and, preferably, between about 0.5 and about 2 mg/kg, of body weight of the recipient per day.
  • the effective dosage range of the pharmaceutically acceptable salts and prodrugs can be calculated based on the weight of the parent compound to be delivered. If the salt or prodrug exhibits activity in itself, the effective dosage can be estimated as above using the weight of the salt or prodrug, or by other means known to those skilled in the art.
  • the compound is conveniently administered in unit any suitable dosage form, including but not limited to but not limited to one containing 7 to 600 mg, preferably 70 to 600 mg of active ingredient per unit dosage form.
  • An oral dosage of 5-400 mg is usually convenient.
  • the concentration of active compound in the drug composition will depend on absorption, inactivation and excretion rates of the drug as well as other factors known to those of skill in the art. It is to be noted that dosage values will also vary with the severity of the condition to be alleviated. It is to be further understood that for any particular subject, specific dosage regimens should be adjusted over time according to the individual need and the professional judgment of the person administering or supervising the administration of the compositions, and that the concentration ranges set forth herein are exemplary only and are not intended to limit the scope or practice of the claimed composition.
  • the active ingredient can be administered at once, or can be divided into a number of smaller doses to be administered at varying intervals of time.
  • Oral compositions will generally include an inert diluent or an edible carrier. They can be enclosed in gelatin capsules or compressed into tablets.
  • the active compound can be incorporated with excipients and used in the form of tablets, troches or capsules. Pharmaceutically compatible binding agents, and/or adjuvant materials can be included as part of the composition.
  • the tablets, pills, capsules, troches and the like can contain any of the following ingredients, or compounds of a similar nature: a binder such as microcrystalline cellulose, gum tragacanth or gelatin; an excipient such as starch or lactose, a disintegrating agent such as alginic acid, Primogel or corn starch; a lubricant such as magnesium stearate or Sterotes; a glidant such as colloidal silicon dioxide; a sweetening agent such as sucrose or saccharin; or a flavoring agent such as peppermint, methyl salicylate, or orange flavoring.
  • a binder such as microcrystalline cellulose, gum tragacanth or gelatin
  • an excipient such as starch or lactose, a disintegrating agent such as alginic acid, Primogel or corn starch
  • a lubricant such as magnesium stearate or Sterotes
  • a glidant such as colloidal silicon dioxide
  • a sweetening agent such
  • the compound can be administered as a component of an elixir, suspension, syrup, wafer, chewing gum or the like.
  • a syrup can contain, in addition to the active compound(s), sucrose as a sweetening agent and certain preservatives, dyes and colorings and flavors.
  • the compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug or salts thereof can also be mixed with other active materials that do not impair the desired action, or with materials that supplement the desired action, such as antibiotics, antifungals, antiinflammatories or other antiviral compounds.
  • Solutions or suspensions used for parenteral, intradermal, subcutaneous, or topical application can include the following components: a sterile diluent such as water for injection, saline solution, fixed oils, polyethylene glycols, glycerine, propylene glycol or other synthetic solvents; antibacterial agents such as benzyl alcohol or methyl parabens; antioxidants such as ascorbic acid or sodium bisulfite; chelating agents, such as ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid; buffers, such as acetates, citrates or phosphates, and agents for the adjustment of tonicity, such as sodium chloride or dextrose.
  • the parental preparation can be enclosed in ampoules, disposable syringes or multiple dose
  • preferred carriers are physiological saline or phosphate buffered saline (PBS).
  • the compositions are present in the form of transdermal formulations, such as that used in the FDA-approved agonist rotigitine transdermal (Neupro patch).
  • a suitable formulation is that described in U.S. Publication No. 20080050424, entitled “Transdermal Therapeutic System for Treating Parkinsonism.”
  • This formulation includes a silicone or acrylate-based adhesive, and can include an additive having increased solubility for the active substance, in an amount effective to increase dissolving capacity of the matrix for the active substance.
  • the transdermal formulations can be single-phase matrices that include a backing layer, an active substance-containing self-adhesive matrix, and a protective film to be removed prior to use. More complicated embodiments contain multiple-layer matrices that may also contain non-adhesive layers and control membranes. If a polyacrylate adhesive is used, it can be crosslinked with multivalent metal ions such as zinc, calcium, aluminum, or titanium ions, such as aluminum acetyl acetonate and titanium acetylacetonate.
  • multivalent metal ions such as zinc, calcium, aluminum, or titanium ions, such as aluminum acetyl acetonate and titanium acetylacetonate.
  • silicone adhesives When silicone adhesives are used, they are typically polydimethylsiloxanes. However, other organic residues such as, for example, ethyl groups or phenyl groups may in principle be present instead of the methyl groups. Because the active compounds are amines, it may be advantageous to use amine-resistant adhesives. Representative amine- resistant adhesives are described, for example, in EP 0 180 377.
  • acrylate-based polymer adhesives include acrylic acid, acrylamide, hexylacrylate, 2-ethylhexylacrylate, hydroxyethylacrylate, octylacrylate, butylacrylate, methylacrylate, glycidylacrylate, methacrylic acid, methacrylamide, hexylmethacrylate, 2- ethylhexylmethacrylate, octylmethacrylate, methylmethacrylate, glycidylmethacrylate, vinylacetate, vinylpyrrolidone, and combinations thereof.
  • the adhesive must have a suitable dissolving capacity for the active substance, and the active substance most be able to move within the matrix, and be able to cross through the contact surface to the skin.
  • Those of skill in the art can readily formulate a transdermal formulation with appropriate transdermal transport of the active substance.
  • Certain pharmaceutically acceptable salts tend to be more preferred for use in transdermal formulations, because they can help the active substance pass the barrier of the stratum corneum.
  • fatty acid salts such as stearic acid and oleic acid salts.
  • Oleate and stearate salts are relatively lipophilic, and can even act as a permeation enhancer in the skin.
  • Permeation enhancers can also be used.
  • Representative permeation enhancers include fatty alcohols, fatty acids, fatty acid esters, fatty acid amides, glycerol or its fatty acid esters, N-methylpyrrolidone, terpenes such as limonene, alpha-pinene, alpha- terpineol, carvone, carveol, limonene oxide, pinene oxide, and 1,8-eucalyptol.
  • the patches can generally be prepared by dissolving or suspending the active agent in ethanol or in another suitable organic solvent, then adding the adhesive solution with stirring. Additional auxiliary substances can be added either to the adhesive solution, the active substance solution or to the active substance-containing adhesive solution. The solution can then be coated onto a suitable sheet, the solvents removed, a backing layer laminated onto the matrix layer, and patches punched out of the total laminate.
  • the compounds described herein can also be administered in the form of nanoparticulate compositions.
  • the controlled release nanoparticulate formulations comprise a nanoparticulate active agent to be administered and a rate-controlling polymer which functions to prolong the release of the agent following administration.
  • the compositions can release the active agent, following administration, for a time period ranging from about 2 to about 24 hours or up to 30 days or longer.
  • Representative controlled release formulations including a nanoparticulate form of the active agent are described, for example, in U.S. Patent No. 8,293,277.
  • Nanoparticulate compositions comprise particles of the active agents described herein, having a non-crosslinked surface stabilizer adsorbed onto, or associated with, their surface.
  • the average particle size of the nanoparticulates is typically less than about 800 nm, more typically less than about 600 nm, still more typically less than about 400 nm, less than about 300 nm, less than about 250 nm, less than about 100 nm, or less than about 50 nm. In one aspect of this embodiment, at least 50% of the particles of active agent have an average particle size of less than about 800, 600, 400, 300, 250, 100, or 50 nm, respectively, when measured by light scattering techniques.
  • a variety of surface stabilizers are typically used with nanoparticulate compositions to prevent the particles from clumping or aggregating.
  • Representative surface stabilizers are selected from the group consisting of gelatin, lecithin, dextran, gum acacia, cholesterol, tragacanth, stearic acid, benzalkonium chloride, calcium stearate, glycerol monostearate, cetostearyl alcohol, cetomacrogol emulsifying wax, sorbitan esters, polyoxyethylene alkyl ethers, polyoxyethylene castor oil derivatives, polyoxyethylene sorbitan fatty acid esters, polyethylene glycols, polyoxyethylene stearates, colloidal silicon dioxide, phosphates, sodium dodecylsulfate, carboxymethylcellulose calcium, carboxymethylcellulose sodium, methylcellulose, hydroxyethylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethyl- cellulose phthalate, noncrystalline cellulose, magnesium aluminum silicate, triethanolamine
  • Lysozymes can also be used as surface stabilizers for nanoparticulate compositions.
  • Certain nanoparticles such as poly(lactic-co-glycolic acid) (PLGA)- nanoparticles are known to target the liver when given by intravenous (IV) or subcutaneously (SQ).
  • IV intravenous
  • SQ subcutaneously
  • the nanoparticles or other drug delivery vehicles are targeted to the liver.
  • One such type of liver-targeted drug delivery vehicle is described in Park, et al, Mol Imaging. Feb 2011 ; 10(1): 69-77, and uses Glypican-3 (GPC3) as a molecular target. Park taught using this target for hepatocellular carcinoma (HCC), a primary liver cancer frequently caused by chronic persistent hepatitis.
  • GPC3 Glypican-3
  • this drug delivery vehicle is also used to target therapeutics to the liver to treat viral infections. Further, since the compounds described herein have anti-cancer uses, this type of system can target the compounds to the liver and treat liver cancers.
  • GPC3 is a heparan sulfate proteoglycan that is not expressed in normal adult tissues, but significantly over-expressed in up to 80% of human HCC's. GPC3 can be targeted, for example, using antibody-mediated targeting and binding (See Hsu, et al, Cancer Res. 1997; 57:5179-84).
  • the '045 patent discloses a dual-particle tumor or cancer targeting system that includes a first ligand-mediated targeting nanoparticle conjugated with galactosamine, with the ligand being on a target cell.
  • the first nanoparticle includes poly(y- glutamic acid)/poly(lactide) block copolymers and n antiviral compound, which in this case is a compound described herein, and in the '045 patent, was gancyclovir.
  • a second nanoparticle includes poly(y-glutamic acid)/poly(lactide) block copolymers, an endothelial cell-specific promoter, and a (herpes-simplex-virus)-(thymidine kinase) gene constructed plasmid, and provides enhanced permeability and retention-mediated targeting.
  • the first and said second nanoparticles are mixed in a solution configured for delivering to the liver.
  • the delivery can be directly to, or adjacent to, the liver tumor or cancer.
  • Representative rate controlling polymers into which the nanoparticles can be formulated include chitosan, polyethylene oxide (PEO), polyvinyl acetate phthalate, gum arabic, agar, guar gum, cereal gums, dextran, casein, gelatin, pectin, carrageenan, waxes, shellac, hydrogenated vegetable oils, polyvinylpyrrolidone, hydroxypropyl cellulose (HPC), hydroxyethyl cellulose (HEC), hydroxypropyl methylcelluose (HPMC), sodium carboxymethylcellulose (CMC), poly(ethylene) oxide, alkyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose, methyl cellulose, carboxymethyl cellulose, hydrophilic cellulose derivatives, polyethylene glycol, polyvinylpyrrolidone, cellulose acetate, cellulose acetate butyrate, cellulose acetate phthalate, cellulose acetate trimellitate, polyvinyl acetate phthalate, hydroxypropylmethyl
  • Nanoparticulate compositions are also described, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 5,298,262 for "Use of Ionic Cloud Point Modifiers to Prevent Particle Aggregation During Sterilization;” U.S. Pat. No. 5,302,401 for “Method to Reduce Particle Size Growth During Lyophilization;” U.S. Pat. No. 5,318,767 for "X-Ray Contrast Compositions Useful in Medical Imaging;” U.S. Pat. No. 5,326,552 for "Novel Formulation For Nanoparticulate X-Ray Blood Pool Contrast Agents Using High Molecular Weight Non-ionic Surfactants;" U.S. Pat. No.
  • the nanoparticle formulations including the compounds described herein, and also in the form of monophosphate prodrugs, and monophosphate, diphosphate, and triphosphate analogs, can be used to treat or prevent infections by flaviviruses, RSV, and influenza infections, and to treat or prevent certain types of cancers, including, but not limited to, liver cancer, acute myeloid leukemia, pancreatic cancer, lung cancer, ovarian cancer, colon cancer, rectal cancer, anal cancer, head and neck cancers, breast cancer, head and neck cancers, stomach cancer, some skin cancers, and other types of cancer described elsewhere herein that are treatable with anti-cancer nucleosides.
  • cancers including, but not limited to, liver cancer, acute myeloid leukemia, pancreatic cancer, lung cancer, ovarian cancer, colon cancer, rectal cancer, anal cancer, head and neck cancers, breast cancer, head and neck cancers, stomach cancer, some skin cancers, and other types of cancer described elsewhere herein that are treatable with anti-cancer nucleo
  • Amorphous small particle compositions are described, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 4,783,484 for "Particulate Composition and Use Thereof as Antimicrobial Agent;” U.S. Pat. No. 4,826,689 for “Method for Making Uniformly Sized Particles from Water- Insoluble Organic Compounds;” U. S. Pat. No. 4,997,454 for “Method for Making Uniformly-Sized Particles From Insoluble Compounds;” U.S. Pat. No. 5,741,522 for "Ultrasmall, Non-aggregated Porous Particles of Uniform Size for Entrapping Gas Bubbles Within and Methods;" and U.S. Pat. No. 5,776,496, for "Ultrasmall Porous Particles for Enhancing Ultrasound Back Scatter. "
  • the active compounds are prepared with carriers that will protect the compound against rapid elimination from the body, such as a controlled release formulation, including but not limited to implants and microencapsulated delivery systems.
  • a controlled release formulation including but not limited to implants and microencapsulated delivery systems.
  • Biodegradable, biocompatible polymers can be used, such as ethylene vinyl acetate, polyanhydrides, polyglycolic acid, collagen, polyorthoesters and polylactic acid.
  • enterically coated compounds can be used to protect cleavage by stomach acid. Methods for preparation of such formulations will be apparent to those skilled in the art. Suitable materials can also be obtained commercially.
  • Liposomal suspensions are also preferred as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. These can be prepared according to methods known to those skilled in the art, for example, as described in US Pat. No. 4,522,811 (incorporated by reference).
  • liposome formulations can be prepared by dissolving appropriate lipid(s) (such as stearoyl phosphatidyl ethanolamine, stearoyl phosphatidyl choline, arachadoyl phosphatidyl choline, and cholesterol) in an inorganic solvent that is then evaporated, leaving behind a thin film of dried lipid on the surface of the container. An aqueous solution of the active compound is then introduced into the container. The container is then swirled by hand to free lipid material from the sides of the container and to disperse lipid aggregates, thereby forming the liposomal suspension.
  • appropriate lipid(s) such as stearoyl phosphatidyl ethanolamine, stearoyl phosphatidyl choline, a
  • N 4 - hydroxycytidine nucleosides derivatives, modified monophosphate and phosphonates prodrugs analogs disclosed herein can be prepared as described in detail below, or by other methods known to those skilled in the art. It will be understood by one of ordinary skill in the art that these schemes are in no way limiting and that variations of detail can be made without departing from the spirit and scope of the present invention.
  • Scheme 1 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, a synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrugs XX, XXI, XXII
  • Scheme 2 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, an alternate synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrugs XX, XXI, XXII.
  • Scheme 3 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, a synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrug XXIII.
  • Scheme 4 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, a synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrug XXIV.
  • Scheme 5 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, a synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrug XXV.
  • Scheme 6 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, an alternate synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrug XXV.
  • Scheme 7 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, a synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrug XXVI.
  • Scheme 8 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, an alternate synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrug XXVI.
  • Scheme 9 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, a synthetic approach to nucleosides 27.
  • Scheme 10 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, an alternate synthetic approach to nucleosides 27.
  • Scheme 11 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, a synthetic approach to nucleosides 29 and 30.
  • Scheme 12 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, an alternate synthetic approach to nucleosides 30.
  • Scheme 13 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and, in particular, a synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrug 35.
  • Scheme 14 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and, in particular, a synthetic approach to A ⁇ -hydroxycytidine 2'-C-Me nucleoside 37.
  • Scheme 15 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and, in particular, a synthetic approach to A ⁇ -hydroxycytidine 2'-deoxy-2'- a-fluoro-2'-P-C-Me nucleoside 39.
  • Scheme 16 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and, in particular, a synthetic approach to N ⁇ -(Octanoyloxy)cytidine - deoxy-2'-a-fluoro-2'-P-C-Me nucleoside 40.
  • Scheme 17 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and, in particular, a synthetic approach to A ⁇ -hydroxycytidine 2'-C-Me nucleoside prodrug 44.
  • Scheme 18 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and, in particular, a synthetic approach to A ⁇ -hydroxycytidine 2'-C-Me nucleoside prodrug 48.
  • Scheme 19 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and, in particular, a synthetic approach to A ⁇ -hydroxycytidine 2'-deoxy-2'- a-fluoro-2'-P-C-Me nucleoside prodrug 51.
  • Scheme 20 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and, in particular, a synthetic approach to active compounds of the present invention, and, in particular, a synthetic approach to ⁇ -hydroxycytidine 2'-C-Me nucleoside prodrugs 54 and 56.
  • nucleosides of formulas XX, XXI or XXII are prepared by protection of compound 1 by a group such as TIPS to provide 2 bearing a free alpha-hydroxyl group at the 3 '-position of the sugar (Scheme 1).
  • Preparation of compound 1 is accomplished by one of ordinary skill in the art, by methods outlined in: (a) Rajagopalan, P.; Boudinot, F. D; Chu, C. K.; Tennant, B. C; Baldwin, B. H.; Antiviral Nucleosides: Chiral Synthesis and Chemotheraphy: Chu, C. K.; Eds. Elsevier: 2003.
  • the resulting amino alcohols can be converted to the monophosphate prodrugs XX or XXI by exposure to phosphorous oxychloride or phosphorothioyl trichloride (POCl 3 or PSCI 3 ) or alternatively after water workup of the phosphorous oxychloride or phosphorothioyl trichloride reaction, a coupling agent such as DCC can be utilized in the formation of XX or XXI.
  • phosphorous oxychloride or phosphorothioyl trichloride POCl 3 or PSCI 3
  • a coupling agent such as DCC can be utilized in the formation of XX or XXI.
  • Compound 7 can be obtained after water workup of the phosphorous oxychloride or phosphorothioyl trichloride reaction and subsequent exposure to phosgene or a phosgene equivalent such as CDI or triphosgene gives monophosphate prodrug XXII.
  • Scheme 1 A synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrugs XX, XXI, XXII.
  • Base is a nnaattuurraall oorr uunnnnaattuurraall nnuucclleeoside base: R 4 , R 5 , R 5 , R 6 , Y, M, R 34 , and R 7 are as defined in active compound section)
  • monophosphate prodrugs XX, XXI, XXII can be synthesized as outlined in Scheme 2, namely nucleoside 1 can be converted to the monophosphate, 8 directly by the action of phosphorous oxychloride or phosphorothioyl trichloride in trimethyl phosphate. Coupling to the amino esters 9 or 10 can be accomplished with standard coupling agents such as DCC to give phosphoramidates 7 and 11. Deprotection and subsequent coupling of 7 or 11 with agents such as EDC, EDC/HOBt, TBTU, or CDI provides monophosphate prodrugs XX and XXI. Monophosphate prodrug XXII can be obtained from 7 as described in Scheme 1.
  • Monophosphate prodrug XXIII can be prepared as outlined in Scheme 3 starting from phenol 12 (Scheme 3). Exposure of 12 to phosphorous oxychloride or phosphorothioyl trichloride provides 13, which is subsequently allowed to react with an amino ester 14 to give phosphoramidate 15. Nucleoside 1 can next be converted to monophosphate analog 16 by reaction of the 5 '-hydroxyl group with the chlorophosphorylamino propanoate, 15. Deprotection and subsequent coupling of 16 with agents such as EDC, EDC/HOBt, TBTU, or CDI provides monophosphate prodrugs XXIII.
  • R , R , R J , R°, Y, R , R , and R' are as defined in active compound section
  • Monophosphate prodrug XXIV can be prepared by reaction of phenol 12 with phosphorous oxychloride or phosphorothioyl trichloride to provide diphenyl phosphorochloridate, 17 (Scheme 4). Nucleoside 1 can next be converted to an intermediate monophosphate analog by reaction of the 5'-hydroxyl group with the diphenyl phosphorochloridate, 17. Deprotection and subsequent ester formation with the 3'-hydroxyl group with agents such as EDC, EDC/HOBt, TBTU, or CDI followed by reesterification with R 5 OH provides monophosphate prodrugs XXIV.
  • R , R , R , R , Y, R , and R are as defined in active compound section
  • Monophosphate prodrug XXV can be prepared by initial reaction of protected tryptophan 18 with protected amino acid 19 with coupling agents such as EDC, EDC/HOBt, TBTU, or CDI to give dipeptide 20 (Scheme 5). Removal of the amine protections gives then diamine 21 which can then be reacted with phosphorous oxychloride or phosphorothioyl trichloride to give the cyclic phosphorodiamidic chloride, 22. Nucleoside 1 can next be converted to a monophosphate analog by reaction of the 5'-hydroxyl group with the cyclic phosphorodiamidic chloride, 22. Deprotection and subsequent coupling of 22 with agents such as EDC, EDC/HOBt, TBTU, or CDI provides monophosphate prodrugs XXV.
  • coupling agents such as EDC, EDC/HOBt, TBTU, or CDI
  • R , R , R J , R°, Y, R , R , R", and R' are as defined in active compound section
  • monophosphate prodrug XXV can be prepared from monophosphate analog 8 followed by coupling with dipeptide 20 (Scheme 6).
  • R , R , R , R , Y, R , R , R , and R are as defined in active compound section
  • Monophosphate prodrug XXVI can be prepared by initial reaction of phosphoramidic dichloride 23 with nucleoside 1 (Scheme 7). Subsequent reaction of the produced intermediate with water, hydrogen sulfide, or an amine provides monophosphate analog 24 (Scheme 7). Exposure of the bis nucleophile 24 to phosgene or a phosgene equivalent such as CDI provides monophosphate prodrugs XXVI.
  • Scheme 7 A synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrug XXVI. (Base is a natural or unnatural nucleoside base; R 4' , R 5 , R 5 , R 6 , Y, M, R 34 , R 35 , R 22 , and R 7' are as defined in active compound section)
  • monophosphate prodrug XXVI (where M is not R) can be prepared by initial reaction of nucleoside 1 with phosphorous oxychloride or phosphorothioyl trichloride as shown in Scheme 8. Subsequent reaction of the produced intermediate with water or hydrogen sulfide followed by reaction with phosgene or a phosgene equivalent such as CDI provides monophosphate prodrugs XXVI. (Scheme 8).
  • Base may contain suitable protection
  • R , R , R , R , Y, R , R , R , and R are as defined in active compound section
  • Nucleoside 27 can be prepared by coupling sugar 26 with a protected or silylated pyrimidine base in the presence of Lewis acid such as TMSOTf. Deprotection of the 5' - hydroxyl gives nucleoside 27. (Scheme 9). 2) deprotection
  • Base may contain suitable
  • LG OCOalkyl, OCOaryl,
  • nucleoside 27 can be prepared from -halo or - hydroxy compound 28.
  • a base such as triethyl amine or sodium hydride followed by deprotection
  • nucleosides 27 For the case of -halo a protected or free pyrimidine base in the presence of a base such as triethyl amine or sodium hydride followed by deprotection would give nucleosides 27.
  • a Mitsunobu coupling agent such as diisopropyl azodicarboxylate followed by deprotection would give nucleosides 27 (Scheme 10).
  • Base may contain suitable
  • X halogen or OH
  • Y NH 2 or OH
  • a ⁇ -hydroxycytidine nucleosides 29 can be prepared by reaction of compound 28 with hydroxylamine (Scheme 11). Subsequent reaction with various acid chlorides provides coresponding A ⁇ -acyloxy derivatives 30.
  • nucleoside 29 can be prepared by initial reaction of nucleoside 31 with phosphorous oxychloride and 1,2,4-triazole or methylimidazole as shown in scheme 12. Subsequent reaction of the produced intermediate with hydroxylamine followed by deprotection of the sugar moiety gives nucleoside 29.
  • Monophosphate prodrug 35 can be prepared by initial reaction of an appropriately protected hydroxylamine derivative with nucleoside 32 (Scheme 13). Subsequent reaction of 33 with phosphoramidate chloride 34 followed by necessary deprotection provides monophosphate prodrug 35.
  • Scheme 2 1 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, a synthetic approach to nucleosides 1.
  • Scheme 22 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, an alternate synthetic approach to nucleosides 1.
  • Scheme 23 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, a synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrugs I.
  • Scheme 24 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, a synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrugs IV, V and VI.
  • Scheme 25 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, a synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrugs VII.
  • Scheme 26 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, a synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrugs VIII.
  • nucleosides 1C can be prepared by first preparing nucleosides 1C, which in turn can be accomplished by one of ordinary skill in the art, using methods outlined in: (a) Rajagopalan, P.; Boudinot, F. D; Chu, C. K.; Tennant, B. C; Baldwin, B. H.; Antiviral Nucleosides: Chiral Synthesis and Chemotheraphy: Chu, C. K.; Eds. Elsevier: 2003. b) Recent Advances in Nucleosides: Chemistry and Chemotherapy: Chu, C. K.; Eds. Elsevier: 2002. c) Frontiers in Nucleosides & Nucleic Acids, 2004, Eds. R. F.
  • nucleosides 1C can be prepared by coupling sugar 2C with a protected, silylated or free nucleoside base in the presence of Lewis acid such as TMSOTf. Deprotection of the 3'- and 5'- hydroxyls gives nucleoside 1C.
  • LG OCOalkyl, OCOaryl, OCOalkylaryl
  • Pi 1 , Pi 2 , PI 3 , and R 5 are as defined in active compound section
  • Compounds of Formula IB can be prepared using the same general reaction scheme, but using the following intermediate (Compound 3A) rather than Compound 2C as shown above:
  • nucleoside base includes functional groups that might interfere with, or be decomposed or otherwise converted during the coupling steps, such functional groups can be protected using suitable protecting groups. After the coupling step, protected functional groups, if any, can be deprotected.
  • nucleosides 1C can be prepared from -halo, -sulfonate or - hydroxy compounds 3B.
  • a protected or free nucleoside base in the presence of a base such as triethyl amine or sodium hydride followed by deprotection would give nucleosides 1C.
  • a Mitsunobu coupling agent such as diisopropyl azodicarboxylate followed by deprotection would give nucleosides 1C.
  • 3B nucleoside base may contain 1C
  • X halogen, sulfonate or OH
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , and R 5 are as defined in active compound section
  • Monophosphate prodrugs I can be prepared as outlined in Scheme 3 starting from phenol 4B. Exposure of 4B to phosphorous oxychloride or phosphorothioyl trichloride provides 5A, which is subsequently allowed to react with an amino ester 6A to give phosphoramidate 7A. Nucleoside 1C can next be converted to monophosphate analog 8A by reaction of the 5'-hydroxyl group with the chlorophosphorylamino propanoate, 7 A. Removal of protecting groups from the base and/or sugar of, if present, provides monophosphate prodrugs I.
  • Monophosphate prodrugs IV can be prepared by reaction of substituted pyridine 9A with phosphorous oxychloride. The resulting intermediate can next be reacted with an ester of an L-amino acid 6A (Scheme 4) to give 11 A. Nucleoside 1C can next be converted to monophosphate analog IV by reaction of the 5'-hydroxyl group with the chlorophosphoryl substrate, 11 A. Removal of protecting groups, if necessary, provides monophosphate prodrugs IV. Utilizing a similar protocol with substitution of 6A by R 15 OH or 9A, monophosphate prodrugs V and VI can also be prepared.
  • R , R , R , R , and R are as defined in active compound section).
  • suitable protection includes protection of OH and amine moieties that are not involved in the coupling chemistry.
  • the protecting groups which include those described in Greene, et al, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis. John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991, can be removed following the coupling step.
  • Monophosphate prodrugs VII can be prepared by reaction of 12A with phosphorous oxychloride to give 13A (Scheme 5). Nucleoside 1C can next be converted to monophosphate analog VII by reaction of the 5'-hydroxyl group with the chlorophosphoryl substrate, 13A. Removal of protecting groups, if necessary, provides monophosphate prodrugs VII.
  • Scheme 25 A synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrugs VII. (Base, R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 5 and R 19 are as defined in active compound section).
  • Monophosphate prodrugs VIII can be prepared by reaction of 14A with phosphorous oxychloride to give 15A (Scheme 6). Nucleoside 1C can next be converted to monophosphate analog VIII by reaction of the 5'-hydroxyl group with the chlorophosphoryl substrate, 15A. Removal of protecting groups, if necessary, provides monophosphate prodrugs VIII.
  • Scheme 26 A synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrugs VIII. (Base, R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 5 , and R 21 are as defined in active compound section).
  • the prodrug formed in Scheme 6 is more stable than a non-cyclic phosphoramidate, and it is also less toxic than phosphoramidates containing an unsubstituted phenol moiety, by virtue of forming a non-toxic metabolite.
  • Scheme 27 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, a synthetic approach to nucleosides 1.
  • Scheme 28 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, an alternate synthetic approach to nucleosides 1.
  • Scheme 29 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, a synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrugs I.
  • nucleosides 1 can be prepared by first preparing nucleosides 1, which in turn can be accomplished by one of ordinary skill in the art, using methods outlined in: (a) Rajagopalan, P.; Boudinot, F. D; Chu, C. K.; Tennant, B. C; Baldwin, B. H.; Antiviral Nucleosides: Chiral Synthesis and Chemotheraphy: Chu, C. K.; Eds. Elsevier: 2003. b) Recent Advances in Nucleosides: Chemistry and Chemotherapy: Chu, C. K.; Eds. Elsevier: 2002. c) Frontiers in Nucleosides & Nucleic Acids, 2004, Eds. R. F. Schinazi & D. C.
  • nucleosides 1 can be prepared by coupling sugar 2 with a protected, silylated or free nucleoside base in the presence of Lewis acid such as TMSOTf. Deprotection of the 3' - and 5'- hydroxyls gives nucleoside 1.
  • 2 nucleoside base may contain 1
  • LG OCOalkyl, OCOaryl, OCOalkylaryl
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 and R 5 are as defined in active compound section
  • nucleoside base includes functional groups that might interfere with, or be decomposed or otherwise converted during the coupling steps, such functional groups can be protected using suitable protecting groups. After the coupling step, protected functional groups, if any, can be deprotected.
  • nucleosides 1 can be prepared from -halo, -sulfonate or - hydroxy compounds 3.
  • a protected or free nucleoside base in the presence of a base such as triethyl amine or sodium hydride followed by deprotection gives nucleosides 1.
  • a Mitsunobu coupling agent such as diisopropyl azodicarboxylate, in the presence of triphenyl phosphine, followed by deprotection gives nucleosides 1.
  • WO2011035250 can be used.
  • Monophosphate prodrugs I can be prepared as outlined in Scheme 3 starting from a phenol such as 4. Exposure of 4 to phosphorous oxychloride or phosphorothioyl trichloride provides 5, which is subsequently allowed to react with an amino ester 6 to give phosphoramidate 7. Nucleoside 1 can next be converted to monophosphate analog 8 by reaction of the 5'-hydroxyl group with the chlorophosphorylamino propanoate, 7. Removal of protecting groups from the base and/or sugar of 8, if present, provides monophosphate prodrugs I.
  • Scheme 30 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, a synthetic approach to nucleosides 1.
  • Scheme 31 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, an alternate synthetic approach to nucleosides 1.
  • Scheme 32 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, a synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrugs I.
  • Scheme 33 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, a synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrugs IV, V and VI.
  • Scheme 34 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, a synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrugs VII.
  • Scheme 35 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, a synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrugs VDI.
  • nucleosides 1 can be prepared by first preparing nucleosides 1, which in turn can be accomplished by one of ordinary skill in the art, using methods outlined in: (a) Rajagopalan, P.; Boudinot, F. D; Chu, C. K.; Tennant, B. C; Baldwin, B. H.; Antiviral Nucleosides: Chiral Synthesis and Chemotheraphy: Chu, C. K. ; Eds. Elsevier: 2003. b) Recent Advances in Nucleosides: Chemistry and Chemotherapy: Chu, C. K.; Eds. Elsevier: 2002. c) Frontiers in Nucleosides & Nucleic Acids, 2004, Eds. R. F. Schinazi & D.
  • nucleosides 1 can be prepared by coupling sugar 2 with a protected, silylated or free nucleoside base in the presence of Lewis acid such as TMSOTf. Deprotection of the 3 '- and 5 '- hydroxyls gives nucleoside 1.
  • LG OCOalkyl, OCOaryl, OCOalkylaryl
  • Pt 1 , R 2 , R 3 , and R 5 are as defined in active compound section
  • nucleoside base includes functional groups that might interfere with, or be decomposed or otherwise converted during the coupling steps, such functional groups can be protected using suitable protecting groups. After the coupling step, protected functional groups, if any, can be deprotected.
  • nucleosides 1 can be prepared from -halo, -sulfonate or - hydroxy compounds 3.
  • a protected or free nucleoside base in the presence of a base such as triethyl amine or sodium hydride followed by deprotection would give nucleosides 1.
  • a Mitsunobu coupling agent such as diisopropyl azodicarboxylate followed by deprotection would give nucleosides 1.
  • 3 nucleoside base may contain 1
  • X halogen, sulfonate or OH
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , and R 5 are as defined in active compound section
  • Monophosphate prodrugs I can be prepared as outlined in Scheme 3 starting from phenol 4. Exposure of 4 to phosphorous oxychloride or phosphorothioyl trichloride provides 5, which is subsequently allowed to react with an amino ester 6 to give phosphoramidate 7. Nucleoside 1 can next be converted to monophosphate analog 8 by reaction of the 5'- hydroxyl group with the chlorophosphorylamino propanoate, 7. Removal of protecting groups from the base and/or sugar of, if present, provides monophosphate prodrugs I. nucleoside 1 may contain
  • Scheme 32 A synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrugs I. (Base, R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 5 , R 16 , R 17 , and R 18 are as defined in active compound section).
  • Monophosphate prodrugs IV can be prepared by reaction of substituted pyridine 9 with phosphorous oxychloride. The resulting intermediate can next be reacted with an ester of an L-amino acid 6 (Scheme 4) to give 11. Nucleoside 1 can next be converted to monophosphate analog IV by reaction of the 5'-hydroxyl group with the chlorophosphoryl substrate, 11. Removal of protecting groups, if necessary, provides monophosphate prodrugs IV. Utilizing a similar protocol with substitution of 6 by R 15 OH or 9, monophosphate prodrugs V and VI could also be prepared.
  • Monophosphate prodrugs VII can be prepared by reaction of 12 with phosphorous oxychloride to give 13 (Scheme 5). Nucleoside 1 can next be converted to monophosphate analog VII by reaction of the 5'-hydroxyl group with the chlorophosphoryl substrate, 13. Removal of protecting groups, if necessary, provides monophosphate prodrugs VII.
  • Monophosphate prodrugs VIII can be prepared by reaction of 14 with phosphorous oxychloride to give 15 (Scheme 6). Nucleoside 1 can next be converted to monophosphate analog VIII by reaction of the 5'-hydroxyl group with the chlorophosphoryl substrate, 15. Removal of protecting groups, if necessary, provides monophosphate prodrugs VIII.
  • Scheme 35 A synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrugs VIII. (Base, R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 5 , and R 21 are as defined in active compound section).
  • the ZIKV sequence from the Polynesian 2013 strain (UNIPROT - A0A024B7W1_9FLAV) was used to construct a homology model for the NS5 RNA- Dependent RNA polymerase (RDRP) using the SwissModel server (http://swissmodel.expasy.org/).
  • JEV was therefore chosen as a structural template for the ZIKV RDRP homology model due to high degree of identity and completeness.
  • the JEV-derived homology model of the ZIKV RDRP was aligned to the Hepatitis C Virus (HCV) replication complex crystal structure with incoming Sofosbuvir-diphosphate (pdbid 4WTG).
  • HCV Hepatitis C Virus
  • pdbid 4WTG Sofosbuvir-diphosphate
  • Figure 1A provides a table of all HCV RDRP residues within 6 A of the incoming Sofosbuvir-diphosphate from crystal structure (4WTG) and their positional equivalent for JEV, DENV, and ZIKV homology model (derived from JEV) after structural alignment. Identical residues across the structures are highlighted in blue, similar residues are highlighted in green, and dissimilar residues are orange.
  • Figure IB is a 3D representation of the HCV RDRP active site showing the position of all residues near the incoming nucleotide.
  • the RDRP backbone is provided as transparent grey ribbons, the RNA primentemplate are rendered as gold cartoons, and the incoming Sofosbuvir-diphosphate is indicated.
  • the residues in the active site are colored according to the table in Figure 1 A, and residue substitutions between HCV and ZIKV are indicated.
  • Anti-Zika virus Assay Propagation of ZIKV in Aedes albopictus C6/36 cells: C6/36 cells (ATCC) will be maintained in Dulbecco's modified Eagle's medium DMEM; Invitrogen) supplemented with 10% fetal bovine serum (FBS) at 28°C and 5% C0 2 . ZIKV (MR 766 strain, ATCC) will be passed three times in C6/36 cells and infection progression will be monitored by flow cytometry. The same procedure will be performed for DENV-2 (positive control).
  • Infection Seed a T-75 vented flask with 7x10 6 vero cells (http://www.atcc.org/products/all/CCL-81.aspx) the day prior to infection. Aspirate media, and quickly thaw one of the virus aliquots. Mix the virus (200 ⁇ .) with 2.5 mL warm media to infect for 1 her at 37C, shaking every 15 min. Add 5.5 mL of warm media to the infection media ( ⁇ 8 mL) and harvest at d4 post infection. The virus was purchased from ATCC (http://www.atcc.org/Products/All/VR-84.aspx).
  • This virus strain is MR766 which was isolated from a rhesus macaque in Kenya (1947). The company passages the virus in suckling mouse brain. Upon receiving the virus, Vero cells can be infected to make a master stock. The virus titer is 6.6 x 10 7 PFU/mL as determined via plaque assay.
  • Plaque counting (plaque forming unit - pfu/mL): the cells will be incubated with 3.7% formaldehyde and 0.1% crystal violet in 20% ethanol. Each virus stock (aliquots of 1 mL) are maintained at -80°C until use.
  • Vero, BFDC or Huh7 cells can be maintained in RPMI or DMEM supplemented with 10% FBS.
  • Vero, BFDC or Huh7 cells can be seeded in culture 96-well microplate at a density of 5,000 cells per well.
  • Cells can be rinsed once with phosphate-buffered saline (PBS), and ZIKV diluted to the desired multiplicity of infection (MOI) can be added to the cells.
  • PBS phosphate-buffered saline
  • MOI multiplicity of infection
  • Cells can be incubated for 24 h at 37°C. Next day, culture medium plus compounds are added to each well, and the cells can be incubated at 37°C and 5% C0 2 for the duration of the experiment (viral kinetics evaluation).
  • Vero or Huh7 cells can be incubated with the culture supernatant from uninfected C6/36 cells to serve as negative controls (mock-infected cells).
  • RNA purification can be performed using RNeasy 96 kit (Qiagen) and ZIKV and ribosomal RNA amplification (endogenous control) using Real-Time PCR assay (7900 HT Sequence Detection System, Applied Biosystems or LightCycler480, Roche).
  • the Delta CT (ZIKV and rRNA), % inhibition, EC50, EC90, and CC50 can then be determined.
  • CPE Cytopathic Effect
  • Cell cytopathic effect (CPE) MTS assay CellTiter 96® AQueous One Solution Cell Proliferation Promega kit, Promega was measured four (Vero) or five (U251 or Huh7) days after compound addition to determine the levels of replication inhibition.
  • LightCycler 480 RNA Master Hydrolysis Probe (Roche) using highly conserved sequences complementary to a 76 bp fragment from the ZIKV envelope gene (Lanciotti et al, 2008) and an endogenous control (TaqMan Ribosomal RNA Control Reagents; Applied Biosystems) by using the LightCycler 480 Instrument II (Roche).
  • Viruses Stock virus can be prepared as described above.
  • Cellular Toxicity Assays Nucleoside and nucleoside monophosphate prodrugs can be evaluated for their potential toxic effects on P4/R5 cells, MT-2 cells and uninfected PHA- stimulated human PBM cell. Log-phase P4/R5, MT-2, and PHA-stimulated human PBM cells can be seeded at 5 x 10 3 to 5 x 10 4 cells/well in 96-well cell culture plates containing 10-fold serial dilutions of the test drug.
  • the cultures can be incubated for 2-4 days, after which 3- (4,5-dimethylthiazol-2-yl)-2,5-diphenyltetrazolium bromide (MTT) dye solution (Promega, Madison, WI) can be added to each well and incubated overnight.
  • MTT 3- (4,5-dimethylthiazol-2-yl)-2,5-diphenyltetrazolium bromide
  • the reaction can be stopped with stop solubilization solution (Promega, Madison, WI) and plates can be read at a wavelength of 570 nm.
  • the median 50% cytotoxic concentration (CC 50 ) can be determined from the concentration-response curve using the median effect method.
  • Mitochondrial Toxicity Assays in HepG2 Cells i) Effect of nucleoside and nucleoside monophosphate prodrugs on Cell Growth and Lactic Acid Production: The effect on the growth of HepG2 cells can be determined by incubating cells in the presence of 0 ⁇ , 0.1 ⁇ , 1 ⁇ , 10 ⁇ and 100 ⁇ drug. Cells (5 x 10 4 per well) can be plated into 12-well cell culture clusters in minimum essential medium with nonessential amino acids supplemented with 10% fetal bovine serum, 1% sodium pyruvate, and 1% penicillin/ streptomycin and incubated for 4 days at 37°C. At the end of the incubation period, the cell number can be determined using a hemocytometer.
  • nucleoside analog Various concentrations (0 ⁇ , 0.1 ⁇ , 1 ⁇ , 10 ⁇ and 100 ⁇ ) of nucleoside analog can be added, and the cultures can be incubated at 37°C in a humidified 5% C0 2 atmosphere for 4 days. At day 4, the number of cells in each well can be determined and the culture medium collected. The culture medium can be filtered, and the lactic acid content in the medium determined using a colorimetric lactic acid assay (Sigma- Aldrich).
  • lactic acid product can be considered a marker for impaired mitochondrial function
  • elevated levels of lactic acid production detected in cells grown in the presence of N 4 -hydroxycytidine nucleosides derivatives, modified monophosphate and phosphonates prodrugs analogs can be used to indicate a drug-induced cytotoxic effect.
  • This assay can be used in all studies described in this application that determine the effect of nucleoside analogs on mitochondrial DNA content.
  • low-passage-number HepG2 cells can be seeded at 5,000 cells/well in collagen-coated 96-well plates.
  • Nucleoside monophosphate analogs can be added to the medium to obtain final concentrations of 0 ⁇ , 0.1 ⁇ , 10 ⁇ and 100 ⁇ .
  • cellular nucleic acids can be prepared by using commercially available columns (RNeasy 96 kit; Qiagen). These kits co-purify RNA and DNA, and hence, total nucleic acids are eluted from the columns.
  • the mitochondrial cytochrome c oxidase subunit II (COXII) gene and the B-actin or rRNA gene can be amplified from 5 ⁇ of the eluted nucleic acids using a multiplex Q-PCR protocol with suitable primers and probes for both target and reference amplifications.
  • COXII the following sense, probe and antisense primers can be used, respectively: 5'-TGCCCGCCATCATCCTA-3', 5'-tetrachloro-6- carboxyfluorescein-TCCTCATCGCCCTCCCATCCC-TAMRA-3' and 5'-
  • the sense, probe, and antisense primers are 5'-GCGCGGCTACAGCTTCA- 3', 5'-6-FAMCACCACGGCCGAGCGGGATAMRA-3' and 5'- TCTCCTTAATGTC ACGC ACGAT-3 ', respectively.
  • the primers and probes for the rRNA gene are commercially available from Applied Biosystems. Since equal amplification efficiencies can be obtained for all genes, the comparative CT method can be used to investigate potential inhibition of mitochondrial DNA synthesis.
  • the comparative CT method uses arithmetic formulas in which the amount of target (COXII gene) is normalized to the amount of an endogenous reference (the B-actin or rRNA gene) and is relative to a calibrator (a control with no drug at day 7).
  • the arithmetic formula for this approach is given by 2- AACT, where AACT is (CT for average target test sample - CT for target control) - (CT for average reference test -CT for reference control) (see Johnson MR, K Wang, JB Smith, MJ Heslin, RB Diasio. Quantitation of dihydropyrimidine dehydrogenase expression by real-time reverse transcription polymerase chain reaction. Anal. Biochem. 2000; 278: 175-184).
  • a decrease in mitochondrial DNA content in cells grown in the presence of drug indicates mitochondrial toxicity.
  • HepG2 cells can be seeded into tissue cultures dishes (35 by 10 mm) in the presence of 0 ⁇ , 0.1 ⁇ , 1 ⁇ , 10 ⁇ and 100 ⁇ nucleoside analog.
  • the cells can be fixed, dehydrated, and embedded in Eponas described previously. Thin sections can be prepared, stained with uranyl acetate and lead citrate, and then examined using transmission electron microscopy.
  • mouse Neuro2A cells (American Type Culture Collection 131) can be used as a model system (see Ray AS, Hernandez- Santiago BI, Mathew JS, Murakami E, Bozeman C, Xie MY, Dutschman GE, Gullen E, Yang Z, Hurwitz S, Cheng YC, Chu CK, McClure H, Schinazi RF, Anderson KS. Mechanism of anti-human immunodeficiency virus activity of beta-D-6- cyclopropylamino-2',3'-didehydro-2',3'-dideoxyguanosine. Antimicrob. Agents Chemother. 2005, 49, 1994-2001).
  • concentrations necessary to inhibit cell growth by 50% can be measured using the 3-(4,5-dimethyl-thiazol-2-yl)-2,5-diphenyltetrazolium bromide dye- based assay, as described. Perturbations in cellular lactic acid and mitochondrial DNA levels at defined concentrations of drug can be carried out as described above. In all experiments, ddC and AZT can be used as control nucleoside analogs.
  • the protein concentration can be determined spectrophotometrically at 280 nm, with extinction coefficients of 234,420, and 71,894 M-1 cm-1 for the large and the small subunits of polymerase ⁇ , respectively.
  • Kinetic Analyses of Nucleotide Incorporation Pre-steady-state kinetic analyses can be carried out to determine the catalytic efficiency of incorporation (k/K) for DNA polymerase ⁇ for nucleoside-TP and natural dNTP substrates. This allows determination of the relative ability of this enzyme to incorporate modified analogs and predict toxicity.
  • Bio-Rad GS-525 molecular image system and quantified with Molecular Analyst (Bio-Rad).
  • CFU-GM assays can be carried out using a bilayer soft agar in the presence of 50 units/mL human recombinant granulocyte/macrophage colony- stimulating factor, while BFU-E assays use a methylcellulose matrix containing 1 unit/mL erythropoietin (see Sommadossi JP, Carlisle R. Toxicity of 3 '-azido-3'-deoxythymidine and 9-(l,3-dihydroxy-2-propoxymethyl) guanine for normal human hepatopoietic progenitor cells in vitro.
  • Cells can be incubated in the presence of the compound for 14-18 days at 37°C with 5% C0 2 , and colonies of greater than 50 cells can be counted using an inverted microscope to determine IC 5 o-
  • the 50% inhibitory concentration (IC 50 ) can be obtained by least-squares linear regression analysis of the logarithm of drug concentration versus BFU-E survival fractions. Statistical analysis can be performed with Student's t test for independent non-paired samples.
  • the toxicity of the compounds can be assessed in Vero, human PBM, CEM (human lymphoblastoid), and can be assessed in MT-2, and HepG2 cells, as described previously (see Schinazi R.F., Sommadossi J. -P., Saalmann V., Cannon D.L., Xie M.-Y., Hart G.C., Smith G.A. & Hahn E.F. Antimicrob. Agents Chemother. 1990, 34, 1061-67). Cycloheximide can be included as positive cytotoxic control, and untreated cells exposed to solvent can be included as negative controls.
  • cytotoxicity can be obtained from the concentration- response curve using the median effective method described previously (see Chou T.-C. & Talalay P. Adv. Enzyme Regul. 1984, 22, 27-55; Belen'kii M.S. & Schinazi R.F. Antiviral Res. 1994, 25, 1-11).
  • IC50 cytotoxicity
  • Nucleoside analog triphosphates can be synthesized from suitably protected nucleosides, using the Ludwig and Eckstein's method. (Ludwig J, Eckstein F. "Rapid and efficient synthesis of nucleoside 5'-0-(l-thiotriphosphates), 5'-triphosphates and 2',3'- cyclophosphorothioates using 2-chloro-4H-l,3,2-benzodioxaphosphorin-4-one" J. Org. Chem. 1989, 54 631-5)
  • the crude nucleoside analog triphosphate can be purified, for example, by FPLC using a HiLoad 26/10 Q Sepharose Fast Flow Pharmacia column and gradient of TEAB buffer (pH 7.0).
  • the product can be characterized by UV spectroscopy, proton and phosphorus NMR, mass spectroscopy and FIPLC.
  • the resulting triphosphates can be used as controls for the cellular pharmacology assays described above and for kinetic work with Zika virus polymerase and other viral and human polymerases.
  • HepG2 cells can be obtained from the American Type Culture Collection (Rockville, MD), and are grown in 225 cm 2 tissue culture flasks in minimal essential medium supplemented with non-essential amino acids, 1% penicillin-streptomycin. The medium can be renewed every three days, and the cells can be subcultured once a week.
  • confluent HepG2 cells can be seeded at a density of 2.5 x 10 6 cells per well in a 6-well plate and exposed to 10 ⁇ of [ H] labeled active compound (500 dpm/pmol) for the specified time periods.
  • the cells are maintained at 37°C under a 5% C0 2 atmosphere. At the selected time points, the cells are washed three times with ice-cold phosphate-buffered saline (PBS).
  • PBS ice-cold phosphate-buffered saline
  • Intracellular active compound and its respective metabolites are extracted by incubating the cell pellet overnight at -20°C with 60% methanol. The extracts are then combined, dried under gentle filtered air flow and stored at -20°C until HPLC analysis.
  • Example 11 Intracellular active compound and its respective metabolites are extracted by incubating the cell pellet overnight at -20°C with 60% methanol. The extracts are then combined, dried under gentle filtered air flow and stored at -20°C until HPLC analysis.
  • a cynomolgus monkey can be surgically implanted with a chronic venous catheter and subcutaneous venous access port (VAP) to facilitate blood collection and can undergo a physical examination including hematology and serum chemistry evaluations and the body weight recording.
  • VAP subcutaneous venous access port
  • Each monkey (six total) receives approximately 250 ⁇ ' of H activity with each dose of active compound at a dose level of 10 mg/kg at a dose concentration of 5 mg/mL, either via an intravenous bolus (3 monkeys, IV), or via oral gavage (3 monkeys, PO).
  • Each dosing syringe is weighed before dosing to gravimetrically determine the quantity of formulation administered.
  • Urine samples are collected via pan catch at the designated intervals (approximately 18-0 hours pre- dose, 0-4, 4-8 and 8-12 hours post-dosage) and processed. Blood samples are collected as well (pre-dose, 0.25, 0.5, 1,2, 3,6, 8, 12 and 24 hours post-dosage) via the chronic venous catheter and VAP or from a peripheral vessel if the chronic venous catheter procedure should not be possible.
  • the blood and urine samples are analyzed for the maximum concentration (Cmax), time when the maximum concentration is achieved (TmaX), area under the curve (AUC), half-life of the dosage concentration (TV,), clearance (CL), steady state volume and distribution (Vss) and bioavailability (F).
  • the assay can be performed essentially as described by Baginski, S. G.; Pevear, D. C; Seipel, M.; Sun, S. C. C; Benetatos, C. A.; Chunduru, S. K.; Rice, C. M. and M. S. Collett "Mechanism of action of a pestivirus antiviral compound" PNAS USA 2000, 97 (14), 7981 - 7986. MDBK cells (ATCC) are seeded onto 96-well culture plates (4,000 cells per well) 24 hours before use.
  • test compounds After infection with BVDV (strain NADL, ATCC) at a multiplicity of infection (MOI) of 0.02 plaque forming units (PFU) per cell, serial dilutions of test compounds are added to both infected and uninfected cells in a final concentration of 0.5% DMSO in growth medium. Each dilution is tested in quadruplicate. Cell densities and virus inocula are adjusted to ensure continuous cell growth throughout the experiment and to achieve more than 90% virus-induced cell destruction in the untreated controls after four days post-infection. After four days, plates are fixed with 50% TCA and stained with sulforhodamine B. The optical density of the wells is read in a microplate reader at 550 nm.
  • the 50% effective concentration (EC 50 ) values are defined as the compound concentration that achieved 50% reduction of cytopathic effect of the virus.
  • the effective concentration can be determined in duplicate 24- well plates by plaque reduction assays.
  • Cell monolayers are infected with 100 PFU/well of virus. Then, serial dilutions of test compounds in MEM supplemented with 2% inactivated serum and 0.75% of methyl cellulose are added to the monolayers. Cultures are further incubated at 37°C for 3 days, then fixed with 50% ethanol and 0.8% Crystal Violet, washed and air-dried. Then plaques are counted to determine the concentration to obtain 90% virus suppression.
  • the concentration to obtain a 6 -log reduction in viral load can be determined in duplicate 24-well plates by yield reduction assays.
  • the assay is performed as described by Baginski, S. G.; Pevear, D. C; Seipel, M.; Sun, S. C. C; Benetatos, C. A.; Chunduru, S. K.; Rice, C. M. and M. S. Collett "Mechanism of action of a pestivirus antiviral compound" PNAS USA 2000,97 (14), 7981 -7986, with minor modifications.
  • MDBK cells are seeded onto 24-well plates (2 x 10 5 cells per well) 24 hours before infection with BVDV (NADL strain) at a multiplicity of infection (MOI) of 0.1 PFU per cell.
  • BVDV NADL strain
  • MOI multiplicity of infection
  • MDBK cells are seeded onto 6-well plates (5 x 10 5 cells per well) 24 h before use. Cells are inoculated with 0.2 mL of test lysates for 1 hour, washed and overlaid with 0.5% agarose in growth medium. After 3 days, cell monolayers are fixed with 3.5% formaldehyde and stained with 1% crystal violet (w/v in 50% ethanol) to visualize plaques. The plaques are counted to determine the concentration to obtain a 6 -log reduction in viral load.
  • Sulfasalazine an FDA approved anti-inflammatory drug
  • Sulfasalazine an FDA approved anti-inflammatory drug
  • the inventors have generated data demonstrating that this compound can inhibit these viruses in culture selectively at micromolar concentrations, with no toxicity up to 100 ⁇ .
  • sulfasalazine (Azulfidine) is commonly used to treat ulcerative colitis and rheumatoid arthritis when administered as delayed-release tablets (Azulfidine EN-tabs).
  • Anti-Dengue activity was shown in a model using a DENV-2 replicon, where % inhibition at 30 ⁇ was 77.4%, and the EC 50 was 8.3 ⁇ .
  • % inhibition at 30 ⁇ was 77.4%
  • the EC 50 was 8.3 ⁇ .
  • the EC 50 was 22.2 ⁇
  • the EC 90 was 61.9 ⁇ .
  • the EC 50 was >100 ⁇ .
  • West Nile virus activity was shown using a WNV replicon, where % inhibition at 30 ⁇ was 78.5%.
  • the EC 50 was 9.9 ⁇ and the EC 90 was 78.3 ⁇ .
  • Toxicity in baby hamster kidney (BHK) cells was > 100 ⁇ , so the compounds can be effective at a safe concentration.
  • the EC 50 was 2.6 ⁇ (Huh-7) and 8.6 (Vero) ⁇ .
  • Sulfasalazine also has activity in DENV-2-Huh infectious system, with an EC 50 of
  • Sulfasalazine showed activity against Dengue (DENV2) and WNV at 30 ⁇ , where the percent inhibition against DENV2 was 77.4 and the percent inhibition against WNV was 78.5.
  • Sulfasalazine is known to cross into the placenta (to concentrations equal to maternal plasma), and is safe for a woman to take while pregnant. Sulfasalazine also crosses the blood brain barrier. In terms of a therapeutic window, sulfasalazine is extraordinarily safe, as doses of up to 4g / day can be taken without side effects (see, for example, Schroder and Campbell, Clinical Pharmacology and Therapeutics, 13(4): 539-551 (1972)). In terms of pharmacokinetic properties, sulfasalazine has generally safe plasma levels (6-50 ⁇ g/ml, which equates to 15-125 ⁇ ). Accordingly, the compound is safe at in vivo concentrations greater than those required to inhibit flaviviruses like ZIKV, DENV, and WNV.
  • Figures 3 A-D show the results of treatment with a compound of the formula:
  • the percent inhibition was 57%, 35%, 5%, and 0%, respectively.
  • Figures 4A-D show the results of treatment with a compound of the formula: at concentrations of 10 ⁇ , 1 ⁇ , 0.1 ⁇ and 0.01 ⁇ , respectively.
  • the percent inhibition was 83%, 73%>, 59%>, and 21%>, respectively.
  • FIG. 5 A-H show the results of treatment with compounds of the formulas:
  • Control 1 beta- D-2'-C-Me-2-amino-7-fluoro-7-deazapurine ribose
  • SSZ or control 1 alone demonstrated EC50S of 210 ⁇ and 5.4 ⁇ , respectively [Fig.6A and 6B.
  • the remaining combinations demonstrated CI values from 1.5 to 2.0, indicating slight to moderate antagonism.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Virology (AREA)
  • Communicable Diseases (AREA)
  • Oncology (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention is directed to compounds, compositions and methods for treating or preventing Zika virus. The compounds include pyrimidine and purine nucleosides and prodrugs thereof, including certain N 4 -hydroxycytidine nucleoside derivatives, sulfasalazine, and various entry inhibitors.

Description

ANTIVIRAL AGENTS FOR TREATING ZIKA AND
DENGUE VIRUS INFECTIONS
Field of the Invention
The present invention is directed to compounds, methods and compositions for treating or preventing infections by the Zika virus. The compounds include using certain small molecules, including nucleosides and monophosphate prodrugs thereof, preferably pyrimidine nucleosides, and sulfasalazine. The present application discloses how to prepare nucleoside derivatives, convert them to therapeutically relevant nucleotide prodrugs, and ultimately deliver corresponding nucleotide triphosphates to the Zika virus polymerase at therapeutically-relevant concentrations.
Background of the Invention
Nucleoside analogs as a class have a well-established regulatory history, with more than 10 currently approved by the US Food and Drug Administration (US FDA) for treating human immunodeficiency virus (HIV), hepatitis B virus (FfBV), and herpes simplex C virus (HSV). The challenge in developing antiviral therapies is to inhibit viral replication without injuring the host cell.
Zika Virus (ZIKV) is emerging mosquito-borne flavivirus that is transmitted by the Aedes genus. Human case reports of clinically diagnosed ZIKV infections include self- limiting acute febrile illnesses with fever, headache, myalgia and rash. Epidemiology studies point out to a widespread distribution of ZIKV in the northern half of Africa, as well as in many countries in Southeast Asia, including Malaysia, India, the Philippines, Thailand, Vietnam, Indonesia and Pakistan. In May 2015, the Pan American Health Organization (PAHO) issued an alert regarding the first confirmed Zika virus infection in Brazil. Since then, the virus has spread to much of South and Central America, and the Caribbean. The outbreak in Brazil led also to reports of Guillain-Barre syndrome and pregnant women giving birth to babies with birth defects and poor pregnancy outcomes. These events prompted new alerts from the Brazil Ministry of Health, the European Centre for Disease Prevention and Control, and CDC concerning the possible association of microcephaly with the recent outbreak of Zika virus infection. According to the CDC, no locally transmitted Zika cases have been reported in the continental United States, but cases have been reported in returning travelers. As of now, there is no drugs or vaccine to treat or prevent Zika virus disease. In light of the fact that acquired ZIKV infections have reached alarming levels worldwide, and have significant and in some cases tragic effects on the effected patient, there remains a strong need to find new effective pharmaceutical agents to treat this disease, with agents that have low toxicity to the host. However, to date, there have been no effective agents to treat, cure, or prevent a ZIKV infection.
It would be advantageous to provide anti-ZIKV agents, compositions including these agents, and methods of treatment using these agents. The present invention provides such agents, compositions and methods.
Summary of the Invention
The present invention provides compounds, methods and compositions for treating or preventing Zika virus (ZIKV) infection in a host. Representative Zika virus strains that can be treated include ArD127707, CHI2871014, Java, MR766, NC14-02042914-3220, ZIKV Hu/Tahiti/01u/2014NIID, KU501215.1 (PRVABC59) and HS2015BA01.
The methods involve administering a therapeutically or prophylactically-effective amount of at least one compound as described herein to treat or prevent an infection by, or an amount sufficient to reduce the biological activity of, a ZIKV infection. The pharmaceutical compositions include one or more of the compounds described herein, in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient, for treating a host with Zika virus. The formulations can further include at least one further therapeutic agent.
Based on homology studies between the HCV and the ZIKV polymerase, and modeling studies using compounds known to inhibit the HCV polymerase, Applicants have determined that certain pyrimidine and purine nucleosides can inhibit the ZIKV polymerase.
Pyrimidine and purine nucleosides are more effective when they are administered in the form of monophosphate prodrugs, as the rate limiting step in forming the active triphosphate is the production of the monophosphate. Sulfasalazine, which has the formula:
Figure imgf000005_0001
and sulfasalazine analogs can be used to treat, prevent, or reduce the biological activity of a ZIKV infection.
Chloroquine, and chloroquine analogs can also be used to treat, prevent, or reduce the biological activity of a ZIKV infection.
The compounds can be combined with one or more additional anti-Zika compounds, including entry inhibitors useful against various viral disorders, and BCX4430 (BioCryst), a viral RNA-dependent RNA polymerase (RdRp) inhibitor.
Brief Description of the Figures
Figure 1A provides a table of all HCV RDRP residues within 6 A of the incoming Sofosbuvir-diphosphate from crystal structure (4WTG) and their positional equivalent for JEV, DENV, and ZIKV homology model (derived from JEV) after structural alignment. Identical residues across the structures are highlighted in blue, similar residues are highlighted in green, and dissimilar residues are orange.
Figure IB is a 3D representation of the HCV RDRP active site showing the position of all residues near the incoming nucleotide. The RDRP backbone is provided as transparent grey ribbons, the RNA primentemplate are rendered as gold cartoons, and the incoming Sofosbuvir-diphosphate is indicated. The residues in the active site are colored according to the table in Figure 1 A, and residue substitutions between HCV and ZIKV are indicated.
Figures 2A and 2B are charts showing the results of uninfected and Zika-infected Vero cells, respectively, stained with 4G2 antibody.
Figures 3A-D show the results of treatment of Zika-infected Vero cells with a compound of the formula:
Figure imgf000006_0001
at concentrations of 10 μΜ, 1 μΜ, 0.1 μΜ and 0.01 μΜ, respectively.
Figures 4A-D show the results of treatment of Zika-infected Vero cells with a compound of the formula:
Figure imgf000006_0002
at concentrations of 10 μΜ, 1 μΜ, 0.1 μΜ and 0.01 μΜ, respectively.
Figures 5 A-H show the results of treatment of Zika-infected Vero cells with various compounds, all at a concentration of 10 μΜ.
Figures 6A-6C are charts showing the percent inhibition of Zika virus (% inhibition) versus the concentration of sulfasalazine (SSZ, μΜ) (Figure 6 A), or control 1 (Figure 6B), or in combination (Figure 6C).
Detailed Description
ZIKV has a positive-sense, single-stranded RNA genome approximately 11 kilobases in length. The genome contains 5 ' and 3 ' untranslated regions flanking a single open reading frame (ORF) that encodes a polyprotein that is cleaved into three structural proteins: the capsid, premembrane/membrane, and envelope, and seven non- structural proteins (NSl, NS2A, NS2B, NS3, NS4A, 2K, NS4B and NS5). One of these proteins, NS5, possesses polymerase activity and is involved in the synthesis of double-stranded RNA from the single- stranded viral RNA genome that serves as the template. ZIKV replication may be prevented through the manipulation of NS5B's polymerase activity via competitive inhibition of NS5B protein. Alternatively, a chain -terminator nucleoside analog also may be incorporated into the extending RNA strand.
Nucleoside derivatives and modified monophosphate prodrug analogs described herein show inhibitory activity against Zika virus. Therefore, the compounds can be used to treat or prevent a viral infection in a host, or reduce the biological activity of the virus. The host can be a mammal, and in particular, a human, infected with Zika virus. Representative Zika virus strains that can be treated include ArD 127707, CHI2871014, Java, MR766, NC14- 02042914-3220, and ZIKV Hu/Tahiti/01u/2014NIID. The methods involve administering an effective amount of one or more of the nucleoside or nucleotides monophosphate prodrugs described herein.
Pharmaceutical formulations including one or more compounds described herein, in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient, are also disclosed. In one embodiment, the formulations include at least one compound described herein and at least one further therapeutic agent.
The present invention will be better understood with reference to the following definitions:
I. Definitions
The terms "independently" is used herein to indicate that the variable, which is independently applied, varies independently from application to application. Thus, in a compound such as R"XYR", wherein R" is "independently carbon or nitrogen," both R" can be carbon, both R" can be nitrogen, or one R" can be carbon and the other R" nitrogen.
As used herein, the term "enantiomerically pure" refers to a nucleotide composition that comprises at least approximately 95%, and, preferably, approximately 97%, 98%, 99% or 100%) of a single enantiomer of that nucleotide.
As used herein, the term "substantially free of or "substantially in the absence of refers to a nucleotide composition that includes at least 85 to 90% by weight, preferably 95% to 98 % by weight, and, even more preferably, 99% to 100% by weight, of the designated enantiomer of that nucleotide. In a preferred embodiment, the compounds described herein are substantially free of enantiomers.
Similarly, the term "isolated" refers to a nucleotide composition that includes at least 85 to 90% by weight, preferably 95% to 98 %> by weight, and, even more preferably, 99% to 100%) by weight, of the nucleotide, the remainder comprising other chemical species or enantiomers.
In some cases, the phosphorus atom may be chiral herein termed "P*" or "P" which means that and that it has a designation of "R" or "S" corresponding to the accepted meanings of Cahn-Ingold-Prelog rules for such assignment. Prodrugs of Formula A may exist as a mixture of diastereomers due to the chirality at the phosphorus center. When chirality exists at the phosphorous center it may be wholly or partially Rp or Sp or any mixture thereof.
The term "alkyl," as used herein, unless otherwise specified, refers to a saturated straight, branched, or cyclic, primary, secondary, or tertiary hydrocarbons, including both substituted and unsubstituted alkyl groups. The alkyl group can be optionally substituted with any moiety that does not otherwise interfere with the reaction or that provides an improvement in the process, including but not limited to but limited to halo, haloalkyl, hydroxyl, carboxyl, acyl, aryl, acyloxy, amino, amido, carboxyl derivatives, alkylamino, dialkylamino, arylamino, alkoxy, aryloxy, nitro, cyano, sulfonic acid, thiol, imine, sulfonyl, sulfanyl, sulfinyl, sulfamonyl, ester, carboxylic acid, amide, phosphonyl, phosphinyl, phosphoryl, phosphine, thioester, thioether, acid halide, anhydride, oxime, hydrazine, carbamate, phosphonic acid, phosphonate, either unprotected, or protected as necessary, as known to those skilled in the art, for example, as taught in Greene, et al, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis. John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991, hereby incorporated by reference. Specifically included are CF3 and CH2CF3
In the text, whenever the term C (alkyl range) is used, the term independently includes each member of that class as if specifically, and separately set out. The term "alkyl" includes Ci-22 alkyl moieties, and the term "lower alkyl" includes Ci-6 alkyl moieties. It is understood to those of ordinary skill in the art that the relevant alkyl radical is named by replacing the suffix "-ane" with the suffix "-yl". The term "alkenyl" refers to an unsaturated, hydrocarbon radical, linear or branched, in so much as it contains one or more double bonds, and the term "lower alkenyl" includes C2-6 alkenyl moieties. The alkenyl group disclosed herein can be optionally substituted with any moiety that does not adversely affect the reaction process, including but not limited to but not limited to those described for substituents on alkyl moieties. Non-limiting examples of alkenyl groups include ethylene, methyl ethylene, isopropylidene, 1,2-ethane-diyl, 1, 1-ethane- diyl, 1,3-propane-diyl, 1,2-propane-diyl, 1,3-butane-diyl, and 1,4-butane-diyl.
The term "alkynyl" refers to an unsaturated, acyclic hydrocarbon radical, linear or branched, in so much as it contains one or more triple bonds, and the term "lower alkynyl" includes C2-6 alkynyl moieties. The alkynyl group can be optionally substituted with any moiety that does not adversely affect the reaction process, including but not limited to those described above for alkyl moeities. Non-limiting examples of suitable alkynyl groups include ethynyl, propynyl, hydroxypropynyl, butyn-l-yl, butyn-2-yl, pentyn-l-yl, pentyn-2-yl, 4- methoxypentyn-2-yl, 3-methylbutyn-l-yl, hexyn-l-yl, hexyn-2-yl, and hexyn-3-yl, 3,3- dimethylbutyn-l-yl radicals.
The term "alkylamino" or "arylamino" refers to an amino group that has one or two alkyl or aryl substituents, respectively.
The term "protected" as used herein and unless otherwise defined refers to a group that is added to an oxygen, nitrogen, or phosphorus atom to prevent its further reaction or for other purposes. A wide variety of oxygen and nitrogen protecting groups are known to those skilled in the art of organic synthesis, and are described, for example, in Greene et al, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, supra.
The term "aryl", alone or in combination, means a carbocyclic aromatic system containing one, two or three rings wherein such rings can be attached together in a pendent manner or can be fused. Non-limiting examples of aryl include phenyl, biphenyl, or naphthyl, or other aromatic groups that remain after the removal of a hydrogen from an aromatic ring. The term aryl includes both substituted and unsubstituted moieties. The aryl group can be optionally substituted with any moiety that does not adversely affect the process, including but not limited to but not limited to those described above for alkyl moieties. Non-limiting examples of substituted aryl include heteroarylamino, N-aryl-N-alkylamino, N- heteroarylamino-N-alkylamino, heteroaralkoxy, arylamino, aralkylamino, arylthio, monoarylamidosulfonyl, arylsulfonamido, diarylamidosulfonyl, monoaryl amidosulfonyl, arylsulfinyl, arylsulfonyl, heteroarylthio, heteroarylsulfinyl, heteroarylsulfonyl, aroyl, heteroaroyl, aralkanoyl, heteroaralkanoyl, hydroxyaralkyl, hydoxyheteroaralkyl, haloalkoxyalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, aryloxy, aralkoxy, aryloxyalkyl, saturated heterocyclyl, partially saturated heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heteroaryloxyalkyl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, arylalkenyl, and heteroarylalkenyl, carboaralkoxy.
The terms "alkaryl" or "alkylaryl" refer to an alkyl group with an aryl substituent. The terms "aralkyl" or "arylalkyl" refer to an aryl group with an alkyl substituent.
The term "halo," as used herein, includes chloro, bromo, iodo and fluoro.
The term "acyl" refers to a carboxylic acid ester in which the non-carbonyl moiety of the ester group is selected from straight, branched, or cyclic alkyl or lower alkyl, alkoxyalkyl, including but not limited to methoxymethyl, aralkyl, including but not limited to benzyl, aryloxyalkyl, such as phenoxymethyl, aryl, including but not limited to phenyl, optionally substituted with halogen (F, CI, Br, I), alkyl (including, but not limited to C i, C2, C3, and C4), alkoxy (including but not limited to Ci, C2, C3, and C4), sulfonate esters, such as alkyl or aralkyl sulphonyl, including but not limited to methanesulfonyl, mono, di or triphosphate esters, trityl or monomethoxytrityl, substituted benzyl, trialkylsilyl (e.g., dimethyl-t- butylsilyl) or diphenylmethylsilyl. Aryl groups in the esters optimally comprise a phenyl group. The term "lower acyl" refers to an acyl group in which the non-carbonyl moiety is lower alkyl.
The terms "alkoxy" and "alkoxyalkyl" embrace linear or branched oxy-containing radicals having alkyl moieties, such as methoxy radical. The term "alkoxyalkyl" also embraces alkyl radicals having one or more alkoxy radicals attached to the alkyl radical, that is, to form monoalkoxyalkyl and dialkoxyalkyl radicals. The "alkoxy" radicals can be further substituted with one or more halo atoms, such as fluoro, chloro or bromo, to provide "haloalkoxy" radicals. Examples of such radicals include fluoromethoxy, chloromethoxy, trifluoromethoxy, difluoromethoxy, trifluoroethoxy, fluoroethoxy, tetrafluoroethoxy, pentafluoroethoxy, and fluoropropoxy.
The term "alkylamino" denotes "monoalkylamino" and "dialkylamino" containing one or two alkyl radicals, respectively, attached to an amino radical. The terms arylamino denotes "monoarylamino" and "diarylamino" containing one or two aryl radicals, respectively, attached to an amino radical. The term "aralkylamino", embraces aralkyl radicals attached to an amino radical. The term aralkylamino denotes "monoaralkylamino" and "diaralkylamino" containing one or two aralkyl radicals, respectively, attached to an amino radical. The term aralkylamino further denotes "monoaralkyl monoalkylamino" containing one aralkyl radical and one alkyl radical attached to an amino radical.
The term "heteroatom," as used herein, refers to oxygen, sulfur, nitrogen and phosphorus.
The terms "heteroaryl" or "heteroaromatic," as used herein, refer to an aromatic that includes at least one sulfur, oxygen, nitrogen or phosphorus in the aromatic ring.
The term "heterocyclic," "heterocyclyl," and cycloheteroalkyl refer to a nonaromatic cyclic group wherein there is at least one heteroatom, such as oxygen, sulfur, nitrogen, or phosphorus in the ring.
Nonlimiting examples of heteroaryl and heterocyclic groups include furyl, furanyl, pyridyl, pyrimidyl, thienyl, isothiazolyl, imidazolyl, tetrazolyl, pyrazinyl, benzofuranyl, benzothiophenyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, benzothienyl, isobenzofuryl, pyrazolyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, benzimidazolyl, purinyl, carbazolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, 1,2,4- thiadiazolyl, isooxazolyl, pyrrolyl, quinazolinyl, cinnolinyl, phthalazinyl, xanthinyl, hypoxanthinyl, thiophene, furan, pyrrole, isopyrrole, pyrazole, imidazole, 1,2,3 -triazole, 1,2,4-triazole, oxazole, isoxazole, thiazole, isothiazole, pyrimidine or pyridazine, and pteridinyl, aziridines, thiazole, isothiazole, 1,2,3-oxadiazole, thiazine, pyridine, pyrazine, piperazine, pyrrolidine, oxaziranes, phenazine, phenothiazine, morpholinyl, pyrazolyl, pyridazinyl, pyrazinyl, quinoxalinyl, xanthinyl, hypoxanthinyl, pteridinyl, 5-azacytidinyl, 5- azauracilyl, triazolopyridinyl, imidazolopyridinyl, pyrrolopyrimidinyl, pyrazolopyrimidinyl, adenine, iV'-alkylpurines, N 6-benzylpurine, iV'-halopurine, iV'-vinypurine, iV'-acetylenic purine, iV'-acyl purine^-hydroxyalkyl purine, iV'-thioalkyl purine, thymine, cytosine, 6- azapyrimidine, 2-mercaptopyrmidine, uracil, N5-alkylpyrimidines, N5-benzylpyrimidines, N5- halopyrimidines, N5-vinylpyrimidine, N5-acetylenic pyrimidine, N5-acyl pyrimidine, N5- hydroxyalkyl purine, and jV'-thioalkyl purine, and isoxazolyl. The heteroaromatic group can be optionally substituted as described above for aryl. The heterocyclic or heteroaromatic group can be optionally substituted with one or more substituents selected from the group consisting of halogen, haloalkyl, alkyl, alkoxy, hydroxy, carboxyl derivatives, amido, amino, alkylamino, and dialkylamino. The heteroaromatic can be partially or totally hydrogenated as desired. As a nonlimiting example, dihydropyridine can be used in place of pyridine. Functional oxygen and nitrogen groups on the heterocyclic or heteroaryl group can be protected as necessary or desired. Suitable protecting groups are well known to those skilled in the art, and include trimethylsilyl, dimethylhexylsilyl, t-butyldimethylsilyl, and t- butyldiphenylsilyl, trityl or substituted trityl, alkyl groups, acyl groups such as acetyl and propionyl, methanesulfonyl, and p-toluenelsulfonyl. The heterocyclic or heteroaromatic group can be substituted with any moiety that does not adversely affect the reaction, including but not limited to but not limited to those described above for aryl.
The term "host," as used herein, refers to a unicellular or multicellular organism in which the virus can replicate, including but not limited to cell lines and animals, and, preferably, humans. Alternatively, the host can be carrying a part of the viral genome, whose replication or function can be altered by the compounds of the present invention. The term host specifically refers to infected cells, cells transfected with all or part of the viral genome and animals, in particular, primates (including but not limited to chimpanzees) and humans. In most animal applications of the present invention, the host is a human patient. Veterinary applications, in certain indications, however, are clearly contemplated by the present invention (such as for use in treating chimpanzees).
The term "peptide" refers to various natural or synthetic compounds containing two to one hundred amino acids linked by the carboxyl group of one amino acid to the amino group of another.
The term "pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug" is used throughout the specification to describe any pharmaceutically acceptable form (such as an ester, phosphate ester, salt of an ester or a related group) of a nucleotide compound which, upon administration to a patient, provides the nucleotide monophosphate compound. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts include those derived from pharmaceutically acceptable inorganic or organic bases and acids. Suitable salts include those derived from alkali metals such as potassium and sodium, alkaline earth metals such as calcium and magnesium, among numerous other acids well known in the pharmaceutical art. Pharmaceutically acceptable prodrugs refer to a compound that is metabolized, for example hydrolyzed or oxidized, in the host to form the compound of the present invention. Typical examples of prodrugs include compounds that have biologically labile protecting groups on functional moieties of the active compound. Prodrugs include compounds that can be oxidized, reduced, aminated, deaminated, hydroxylated, dehydroxylated, hydrolyzed, dehydrolyzed, alkylated, dealkylated, acylated, deacylated, phosphorylated, or dephosphorylated to produce the active compound. The prodrug forms of the compounds of this invention can possess antiviral activity, can be metabolized to form a compound that exhibits such activity, or both.
Prodrugs also include amino acid esters of the disclosed nucleosides (see, e.g., European Patent Specification No. 99493, the text of which is incorporated by reference, which describes amino acid esters of acyclovir, specifically the glycine and alanine esters which show improved water-solubility compared with acyclovir itself, and US Pat. No. 4,957,924 (Beauchamp), which discloses the valine ester of acyclovir, characterized by side- chain branching adjacent to the a-carbon atom, which showed improved bioavailability after oral administration compared with the alanine and glycine esters). A process for preparing such amino acid esters is disclosed in US Pat. No. 4,957,924 (Beauchamp), the contents of which are incorporated by reference. As an alternative to the use of valine itself, a functional equivalent of the amino acid can be used (e.g. , an acid halide such as the acid chloride, or an acid anhydride). In such a case, to avoid undesirable side-reactions, it may be advantageous to use an amino-protected derivative.
II. Active Compounds
In a first embodiment, the compounds have one of the following formulae:
Figure imgf000013_0001
Formula A Formula B Formula C
Figure imgf000014_0001
Formula D wherein:
X1 is H, Ci-Cealkyl, C3-8 cycloalkyl, C3-8 cycloalkyl-Ci-6 alkyl, Ci-C6haloalkyl, Ci- C6alkoxy, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, COR1, or COOR1;
X2 is hydrogen, Ci-C6alkyl, C3-8 cycloalkyl, C3-8 cycloalkyl-Ci-6 alkyl, Ci- C6haloalkyl, Ci-C6alkoxy, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, -OH, COR1, OCOR1, COOR1 or OCOOR1; each X3 and X4 is independently H, Ci-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, halogen (F, CI, Br, I), H2, OH, SH, CN, or N02;
Y1 and Y2 are, independently, N, or C-X ,
R1 is independently CH2-0(CO)-X5; CH2-0(CO)0-X5, Ci-20 alkyl, the carbon chain derived from a fatty alcohol or Ci-2o alkyl substituted with a Ci-C6 alkyl, Ci-C6 alkoxy, di(Ci- C6 alkyl)-amino, C3-10 cycloalkyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl; wherein the substituents are C 1-5 alkyl, or C1-5 alkyl substituted with a Ci-C6 alkyl, Ci-C6 alkoxy, di(Ci-C6 alkyl)-amino, C3-10 cycloalkyl, or C3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl;
X5 is independently, Ci-2o alkyl, the carbon chain derived from a fatty alcohol or Ci-2o alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, alkoxy, C3-10 cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl; wherein the substituents are C i-6 alkyl, or Ci-6 alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, Ci-6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, or C3-10 cycloalkyl,
Sugar is of Formula (II):
Figure imgf000015_0001
(Π) wherein:
W is CL2 or CL2CL2, wherein L independently is selected from the group consisting of H, Ci-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, and C2-6 alkynyl, wherein Ci-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, and C2-6 alkynyl can each optionally contain one or more heteroatoms;
D is H, -QC R1, -CCC OR1, -C(0)N(R1)2, -C^SR1, -0(0)8(0)^, -C^SOzR1, - SOR1 ,
Figure imgf000015_0002
-S(0)2R1, -S(0)2N(R1)2, a diphosphate ester, a triphosphate ester, a phosphonate, a lipid, or stabilized phosphate prodrug;
R1 is, independently, -CH2-0(CO)-X5; -CH2-0(CO)0-X5, Ci-20 alkyl, the carbon chain derived from a fatty alcohol or Ci-2o alkyl substituted with a Ci-C6 alkyl, alkoxy, di(Ci-C6 alkyl)-amino, C3-10 cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl; wherein the substituents are Ci-6 alkyl, or Ci-6 alkyl substituted with a Ci-C6 alkyl, Ci-C6 alkoxy, di(Ci-C6 alkyl)-amino, or C3-10 cycloalky;
X5 is independently, Ci-2o alkyl, the carbon chain derived from a fatty alcohol or Ci-2o alkyl substituted with a Ci-C6 alkyl, alkoxy, C3-10 cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl; wherein the substituents are Ci-6 alkyl, or Ci-6 alkyl substituted with a Ci-C6 alkyl, Ci-C6 alkoxy, di(Ci-C6 alkyl)-amino, or C3-10 cycloalkyl;
A is O, S, CH2, CHF, CF2, C=CH2, C=CHF, or C=CF2;
7' 4' 5 5' 6 6' 7'
and R' R" , R , RJ , R°, R° , and R' are independently selected from the group consisting of H, F, CI, Br, I, OH, SH, H2, HOH, HNH2, N3, C(0)OH, CN, CH2OH, C(0) H2, C(S) H2, C(0)OR, R, OR, SR, SSR, NHR, and NR2; with the proviso that there are not two NH2, OH, and/or SH moieties on the same carbon atom; R5 and R6 can come together to form a ring
Figure imgf000016_0001
In one embodiment, the compounds are of Formula A. In another embodiment, the compounds are of Formula B. In one embodiment, A is O.
In one embodiment, R4 and R7 are both H.
In one embodiment, R6 or R6 is OH.
In one embodiment, X2 is -OH, OCOR1, or OCOOR1.
In one embodiment, R5 and R5 , are methyl and OH.
In one embodiment, R5 and R5 , are methyl and F.
In one embodiment, R5 and R5 , are CI and F.
In one embodiment, R5 and R5 , are Br and F.
In one embodiment, R5 and R5 , are CI and CI.
In one embodiment, R5 and R5 , are Br and Br.
In one embodiment, R5 and R5 , are F and F.
It is intended that each one or more of these specific definitions for the different substituents can be combined, and combinations of these specific definitions are intended to be within the scope of the invention.
In a second embodiment, the compounds are of one of the following formulae:
Figure imgf000017_0001
Formula A Formula B Formula C
Figure imgf000017_0002
Formula D wherein:
X1 is H, Ci-Cealkyl, C3-8 cycloalkyl, C3-8 cycloalkyl-Ci-6 alkyl, Ci-C6haloalkyl, Ci- C6alkoxy, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, COR1, or COOR1;
X2 is hydrogen, Ci-C6alkyl, C3-8 cycloalkyl, C3-8 cycloalkyl-Ci-6 alkyl, Ci- C6haloalkyl, Ci-C6alkoxy, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, -OH, COR1, OCOR1, COOR1 or OCOOR1; each X3 and X4 is independently H, Ci-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, halogen (F, CI, Br, I), H2, OH, SH, CN, or N02;
Y1 and Y2 are, independently, N, or C-X ,
R1 is independently CH2-0(CO)-X5; CH2-0(CO)0-X5, Ci-20 alkyl, the carbon chain derived from a fatty alcohol or Ci-2o alkyl substituted with a Ci-C6 alkyl, Ci-C6 alkoxy, di(Ci- C6 alkyl)-amino, C3-10 cycloalkyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl; wherein the substituents are C 1-5 alkyl, or C1-5 alkyl substituted with a Ci-C6 alkyl, Ci-C6 alkoxy, di(Ci-C6 alkyl)-amino, C3-10 cycloalkyl, or C3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl; X5 is independently, C1-20 alkyl, the carbon chain derived from a fatty alcohol or C1-20 alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, alkoxy, C3-10 cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl; wherein the substituents are Ci-6 alkyl, or Ci_6 alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, Ci_6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, or C3-10 cycloalkyl, and
Sugar is of the general Formulas (III) or (IV):
Figure imgf000018_0001
(III) (IV) wherein:
Y is O or S;
Z is selected from the group consisting of CL2, CL2CL2, CL2OCL2, CL2SCL2, CL20, OCL2 and CL2 HCL2, wherein L independently is selected from the group consisting of H, F, Ci-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, and C2-6 alkynyl, wherein Ci_6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, and C2-6 alkynyl can each optionally contain one or more heteroatoms;
A is O, S, CH2, CHF, CF2, C=CH2, C=CHF, or C=CF2;
R4', R5, R5 , R6, R6', and R7' are independently selected from the group consisting of H, F, CI, Br, I, OH, SH, H2, HOH, HNH2, N3, C(0)OH, CN, CH2OH, C(0) H2, C(S) H2, C(0)OR, R, OR, SR, SSR, HR, and NR2;
R5 and R6 can come together to form a ring
Figure imgf000018_0002
wherein when A is O or S, R7 cannot be OH, SH, H2, NHOH, NHNH2, OR, SR, SSR, NHR, or NR2, and R is independently a Ci-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, and C2-6 alkynyl, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, or arylalkyl, wherein the groups are optionally substituted with one or more substituents as defined above, 24 is selected from the group consisting of OR15,
Figure imgf000019_0001
, and fatty alcohols,
R15 is selected from the group consisting of H, Li, Na, K, phenyl and pyridinyl; wherein phenyl and pyridinyl are optionally substituted with one to three substituents independently selected from the group consisting of (CH2)o-6C02R16 and (CH2)o-6CON(R16)2;
R17 is selected from those groups occurring in natural L-amino acids, Ci-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, or arylalkyl, wherein the groups are optionally substituted with one or more substituents as defined above,
R18 is H, Ci-20 alkyl, the carbon chain derived from a fatty alcohol or Ci-20 alkyl substituted with a Ci-C6 alkyl, Ci-C6 alkoxy, di(Ci-C6 alkyl)-amino, C3-io cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl; wherein the substituents are C1-5 alkyl, or C1-5 alkyl substituted with a Ci-C6 alkyl, Ci-C6 alkoxy, di(Ci-C6 alkyl)-amino, C3-io cycloalkyl, or cycloalkyl;
R2 and R3 are independently selected from the group consisting of:
(a) OR8 where R8 is H, Li, Na, K, Ci-20 alkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, Ci-6 haloalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, optionally substituted with one to three substituents independently selected from the group consisting of Ci-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, Ci-6 alkoxy, (CH2)o-6C02R9a, halogen, Ci-6 haloalkyl, -N(R9a)2, Ci-6 acylamino, -NHS02Ci-6 alkyl, -S02N(R9a)2, -S02Ci-6
Figure imgf000019_0002
wherein
R21
is as defined below;
R9a is independently H, C1-20 alkyl, the carbon chain derived from a fatty alcohol or Ci-20 alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, Ci_6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, C3-10 cycloalkyl, C3 - 10 cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl; wherein the substituents are C1-5 alkyl, or C1-5 alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, Ci-6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, C3-io cycloalkyl, or C3-io cycloalkyl alkyl;
Figure imgf000020_0001
where Rlua and R1UB are:
(i) independently selected from the group consisting of H, Ci-10 alkyl, -(CH2)r R a 2, Ci.6 hydroxyalkyl, -CH2SH, -(CH2)2S(0)pMe, -(CH2)3 HC(= H)NH2, (lH-indol-3- yl)methyl, (lH-imidazol-4-yl)methyl, -(CH2)mCOR9b, aryl and aryl-Ci-3 alkyl, wherein said aryl groups are optionally substituted with a group selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, Ci-10 alkyl, Ci-6 alkoxy, halogen, nitro, and cyano;
(ii) R10a is H and R10b and R12 together are (CH2)2-4 to form a ring that includes the adjoining N and C atoms;
(Hi) R10a and R10b together are (CH2)nto form a ring;
(iv) R10a and R10b both are Ci-6 alkyl; or
(v) R10a is H and R10b is H, CH3, CH2CH3, CH(CH3)2, CH2CH(CH3)2, CH(CH3)CH2CH3, CH2Ph, CH2-indol-3-yl, -CH2CH2SCH3, CH2C02H, CH2C(0) H2, CH2CH2COOH, CH2CH2C(0) H2, CH2CH2CH2CH2 H2-CH2CH2CH2 HC( H) H2, CH2- imidazol-4-yl, CH2OH, CH(OH)CH3, CH2((4'-OH)-Ph), CH2SH, or C3-i0 cycloalkyl; p is 0 to 2; r is 1 to 6; n is 4 or 5; m is 0 to 3;
R11 is H, Ci-io alkyl, or C1-10 alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, Ci_6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, C3-10 cycloalkyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl; wherein the substituents are C1-5 alkyl, or C1-5 alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, Ci_6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, C3-10 cycloalkyl, or C3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl;
R12 is H or Ci-3 alkyl, or R10a, or R10b and R12 together are (CH2)2-4 so as to form a ring that includes the adjoining N and C atoms;
(d) an O attached lipid (including a phospholipid), an N or O attached peptide, an O attached cholesterol, or an O attached phytosterol;
(e) R2 and R3 can come together to form a ring
Figure imgf000021_0001
selected from the group consisting of phenyl or monocyclic heteroaryl, optionally substituted with one to three substituents independently selected from the group consisting of Ci-6 alkyl,
CF3, C2-6 alkenyl, Ci-6 alkoxy, OR , C02R , COR , halogen, Ci-6 haloalkyl, -N(R9a)2, Ci ■6 acylamino, C02N(R9a)2, SR9a, -NHS02Ci-6 alkyl, -S02N(R9a)2, -S02Ci-6 alkyl, COR9b, and cyano, and wherein said monocyclic heteroaryl and substituted monocyclic heteroaryl has 1 -2 heteroatoms that are independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, and S, with the provisos that: a) when there are two heteroatoms and one is O, then the other cannot be O or S, and b) when there are two heteroatoms and one is S, then the other cannot be O or S; R9a is independently H or Ci_6 alkyl;
R9b is -OR9a or -N(R9a)2; R9c is H or Ci-6 acyl; (f) R and R can come together to form a ring
Figure imgf000022_0001
R is H, Ci_
20 alkyl, C1-20 alkenyl, the carbon chain derived from a fatty alcohol or C1-20 alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, Ci_6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, C3-10 cycloalkyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl; wherein the substituents are C1-5 alkyl, or C1-5 alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, Ci_6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, C3-10 cycloalkyl, or C3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl;
(g)
Figure imgf000022_0002
is selected from the group consisting of H, Ci-io alkyl, C1-10 alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, Ci_6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, C - io cycloalkyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl moiety; wherein the substituents are C1-5 alkyl, or C1-5 alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, Ci_6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, C3-10 cycloalkyl, or C3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl;
(h) R2 and R3 can come together to form a ring
Figure imgf000022_0003
where R14 is:
(i) independently selected from the group consisting of H, C1-10 alkyl, -(CH2)r R2 9a, Ci.6 hydroxyalkyl, -CH2SH, -(CH2)2S(0)pMe, -(CH2)3 HC(= H)NH2, (lH-indol-3- yl)methyl, (lH-imidazol-4-yl)methyl, -(CH2)mCOR9b, aryl, aryl-Ci- alkyl, heteroaryl, and heteroaryl-Ci- alkyl, wherein said aryl and heteroaryl groups are optionally substituted with a group selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, C1-10 alkyl, Ci_6 alkoxy, halogen, nitro, and cyano;
(ii) R14 is H, CH3, CH2CH3, CH(CH3)2, CH2CH(CH3)2, CH(CH3)CH2CH3, CH2Ph, CH2-indol-3-yl, -CH2CH2SCH3, CH2C02H, CH2C(0) H2, CH2CH2COOH, CH2CH2C(0) H2, CH2CH2CH2CH2 H2, CH2CH2CH2 HC( H)NH2, CH2-imidazol-4-yl, CH2OH, CH(OH)CH3, CH2((4'-OH)-Ph), CH2SH, or C3-i0 cycloalkyl; p is 0 to 2; r is 1 to 6; m is 0 to 3
Q1 is R9a, O, or S
Q2 is Ci-io alkyl, Ci_6 hydroxyalkyl, aryl and aryl-Ci- alkyl, heteroaryl and heteroaryl- Ci- alkyl, said aryl and heteroaryl groups optionally substituted with a group selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, Ci-io alkyl, Ci_6 alkoxy, fluoro, and chloro;
R11 is H, Ci-io alkyl, Ci-io alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, Ci_6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, C -io cycloalkyl, C -io cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl moiety; wherein the substituents are C i-5 alkyl, or Ci-5 alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, Ci_6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, C -io cycloalkyl, or C -io cycloalkyl alkyl;
12 14b 12
R is H or Ci- alkyl, or R and R together are (CH2)2-4 so as to form a ring that includes the adjoining N and C atoms;
(i) R2 and R3 can come together to form a ring selected from the group consisting of
Figure imgf000023_0001
where R is O or H and
R21 is selected from the group consisting of H, C i-2o alkyl, Ci-2o alkenyl, the carbon chain derived from a fatty acid, and C i-2o alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, Ci_6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, C -io cycloalkyl, C -io cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl; wherein the substituents are C 1-5 alkyl, or Ci-5 alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, Ci-6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, C -io cycloalkyl, or C -io cycloalkyl alkyl, and (j) R2 is a monophosphate ester or a diphosphate ester when R3 is OH, 0"K+, 0~Li+, or
0"Na+.
In one embodiment, the compounds are of Formula A. In another embodiment, the compounds are of Formula B. In another embodiment, the sugar is of Formula III.
In one aspect of this embodiment, R2 is OR8 , where R8 is aryl, optionally substituted with one to three substituents independently selected from the group consisting of Ci-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, Ci-6 alkoxy, (CH2)0-6CO2R9a, halogen, Ci-6 haloalkyl, -N(R9a)2, Ci-6 acylamino, - HS02Ci-6 alkyl, -S02N(R9a)2, -S02Ci-6 alkyl, COR9b, nitro, cyano and
Figure imgf000024_0001
In another aspect of this embodiment, R3 In one embodiment, A is O.
In one embodiment, R4 and R7 are both H.
In one embodiment, R6 or R6 is OH.
In one embodiment, X2 is -OH, OCOR1, or OCOOR1.
In one embodiment, R and R , are methyl and OH.
In one embodiment, R5 and R5 , are methyl and F.
In one embodiment, R5 and R5 , are CI and F.
In one embodiment, R5 and R5 , are Br and F. In one embodiment, R5 and R5 , are CI and CI. In one embodiment, R5 and R5 , are Br and Br. In one embodiment, R5 and R5 , are F and F.
It is intended that each one or more of these specific definitions for the different substituents can be combined, and combinations of these specific definitions are intended to be within the scope of the invention.
Specific active compounds include the following:
Figure imgf000025_0001
Figure imgf000026_0001
In one aspect of this second embodiment, the compound has the formula:
Figure imgf000026_0002
or is an analog of this compound where, at the 2' -position, the methyl is replaced with CI, Br, or F.
In a third embodiment, the compounds are of one of the following formulae:
Figure imgf000026_0003
Formula A Formula C
Figure imgf000026_0004
Formula D wherein:
X1 is H, Ci-Cealkyl, C3-8 cycloalkyl, C3-8 cycloalkyl-Ci-6 alkyl, Ci-C6haloalkyl, Ci- C6alkoxy, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, COR1, or COOR1;
X2 is hydrogen, Ci-C6alkyl, C3-8 cycloalkyl, C3-8 cycloalkyl-Ci-6 alkyl, Ci- C6haloalkyl, Ci-C6alkoxy, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, -OH, COR1, OCOR1, COOR1 or OCOOR1; each X3 and X4 is independently H, Ci-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, halogen (F, CI, Br, I), H2, OH, SH, CN, or N02;
Y1 and Y2 are, independently, N, or C-X ,
R1 is independently CH2-0(CO)-X5; CH2-0(CO)0-X5, Ci-20 alkyl, the carbon chain derived from a fatty alcohol or Ci-2o alkyl substituted with a Ci-C6 alkyl, Ci-C6 alkoxy, di(Ci- C6 alkyl)-amino, C3-10 cycloalkyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl; wherein the substituents are C 1-5 alkyl, or C1-5 alkyl substituted with a Ci-C6 alkyl, Ci-C6 alkoxy, di(Ci-C6 alkyl)-amino, C3-10 cycloalkyl, or C3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl;
X5 is independently, Ci-2o alkyl, the carbon chain derived from a fatty alcohol or Ci-2o alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, alkoxy, C3-10 cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl; wherein the substituents are C i-6 alkyl, or Ci-6 alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, Ci-6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, or C3-10 cycloalkyl, and
Sugar is of the general Formula (V):
Figure imgf000027_0001
(V) wherein:
D is H, C(0)R1, C(0)OR1, diphosphate ester, or triphosphate ester;
R1 is independently C1-20 alkyl, the carbon chain derived from a fatty alcohol or C1-20 alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, Ci_6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, C3-10 cycloalkyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl; wherein the substituents are C1-5 alkyl, or C1-5 alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, Ci_6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, C3-10 cycloalkyl, or C3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl;
W is CL2 or CL2CL2, wherein L independently is selected from the group consisting of H, Ci-6 alkyl, C2 -6 alkenyl, and C2-6 alkynyl, wherein Ci-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, and C2-6 alkynyl can each optionally contain one or more heteroatoms;
A, R2, R3, Y, Z, R4', R5 , R6', and Rr are as defined above; wherein, when A is O or S, R7 cannot be OH, SH, H2, NHOH, HNH2, OR, SR, SSR, HR, and R2, wherein R is independently a Ci-C6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, or arylalkyl, wherein the groups are optionally substituted with one or more substituents as defined above, and wherein, when A is O or CH2, D is H or acyl, W is CH2, R4 and R7 are H, then, R5 and R6' cannot be H, halogen, OH, SH, OCH3, SCH3, NH2, HCH3, CH3, CH=CH2, CN, CH2 H2, CH2OH, or COOH, or the general Formula (VI):
Figure imgf000028_0001
wherein: A, R2, R3, Y, Z, R4', R5 , R6', and Rr are as defined above; wherein, when A is O or S, R7 cannot be OH, SH, H2, HOH, HNH2, OR, SR, SSR, HR, or R2, wherein R is independently a Ci-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, or arylalkyl, wherein the groups can optionally be substituted with one or more substituents as defined above, or one of the general Formulas (VII), (VIII), (IX), and (X):
Figure imgf000029_0001
(VII) (vni) (IX) (X) wherein:
D is H, C(0)R1, C(0)OR1, diphosphate ester, or triphosphate ester; V is, individually, S or Se;
R1 is independently C1 -20 alkyl, the carbon chain derived from a fatty alcohol or C1-20 alkyl substituted with a Ci-C6 alkyl, Ci-C6 alkoxy, di(Ci-C6 alkyl)-amino, C3-10 cycloalkyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl; wherein the substituents are C1-5 alkyl, or C1-5 alkyl substituted with a Ci-C6 alkyl, Ci-C6 alkoxy, di(Ci-C6 alkyl)-amino, C3-10 cycloalkyl, or C3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl; wherein D cannot be H or acyl, or one of the general formulas (XI), (ΧΠ), (XIII), and (XIV):
Figure imgf000029_0002
(XI) (ΧΠ) (XIII) (XIV) wherein:
V is, individually, S or Se;
R2, R3, Y, and Z are as defined above, or the general Formula (XV):
Figure imgf000030_0001
(XV) wherein:
Rz, R and Y are as defined above; and
R30 is selected from the group consisting of C1 -20 alkyl, C2-20 alkyl, C2-20 alkenyl, C2-20 alkynyl, C3 -10 cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, and alkylaryl. or one of the general Formulas (XVI) or (XVII):
Figure imgf000030_0002
(XVI) (XVII) wherein:
R2, R3, Z, and Y are as defined above:
Y2 is O, S, Se, or R:
R is, independently, a Ci-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, or aiylalkyl, wherein the groups are optionally substituted with one or more substituents as defined above,
R31, R31 ' and R32 are H, C¾, or CH2OR33; and R is H or Ci-C6 acyl, or the general Formula (XVIII)
Figure imgf000031_0001
(XVIII) wherein:
D, W, R4', R5, R5 , R6, and R6' are as defined above;
R19 is H, F, CI, Br, I, N3, C(0)OH, CN, C(0)NH2, C(S)NH2, C(0)OR, or R; wherein R is independently Ci-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, or arylalkyl, wherein the groups are optionally substituted with one or more substituents as defined above, wherein, when D is H or acyl, W is CH2, R4' and R19 are H, then, R5, R5 , R6, R6' cannot be H, halogen, OH, SH, OCH3, SCH3, NH2, NHCH3, CH3, CH=CH2, CN, CH2NH2, CH2OH, or COOH, or the general formula (XIX):
Figure imgf000031_0002
(XIX) wherein:
R2, R3, R4', R5, R5 , R6, and R6', Y and Z are as defined above,
R19 is H, F, CI, Br, I, N3, C(0)OH, CN, C(0)NH2, C(S)NH2, C(0)OR, or R, and wherein R is independently Ci-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, or arylalkyl, wherein the groups are optionally substituted with one or more substituents as defined above, or one of the Formulas (XX), (XXI), or (XXII):
Figure imgf000032_0001
(XX) (XXI) (XXII) wherein:
A, R4', R5, R5 , R6, Y, and R7' are as defined above;
R34 is Ci-C6 alkyl; M is O, S, or R; wherein R is, independently, Ci-C6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, or arylalkyl, wherein the groups are optionally substituted with one or more substituents as defined above, or one of the Formulas (XXIII) or (XXIV):
Figure imgf000032_0002
(XXIII) (XXIV) wherein:
A, R4', R5, R5 , R6, Y, R34, and R7' are as defined above,
R35 is H, Ci-10 alkyl, Ci-10 alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, Ci-6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, C3-10 cycloalkyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl moiety; wherein the substituents are C1-5 alkyl, or Ci-5 alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, Ci_6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, C3-10 cycloalkyl, or C3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl; and
R22 is H, CH3, CH2CH3, CH(CH3)2, CH2CH(CH3)2, CH(CH3)CH2CH3, CH2Ph, CH2- indol-3-yl, -CH2CH2SCH3, CH2C02H, CH2C(0)NH2, CH2CH2COOH, CH2CH2C(0)NH2, CH2CH2CH2CH2NH2, CH2CH2CH2NHC(NH)NH2, CH2-imidazol-4-yl, CH2OH, CH(OH)CH3, CH2((4'-OH)-Ph), CH2SH, or C3-6 cycloalkyl, or one of the Formulas (XXV) or (XXVI):
Figure imgf000033_0001
(XXV) (XXVI) wherein:
R4', R5, R5 , R6, Y, R7', R22 R34 and R35 are as defined above.
In a fourth embodiment, the compound is sulfasalazine or a sulfasalazine analog:
Figure imgf000033_0002
Sulfasalazine analogs include, but are not limited to, Ipsalazide, Balsalazine, and those disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 4,849,416, U.S. Patent No. 7, 151,095. These analogs generally have the formula:
Figure imgf000033_0003
wherein
X is pyridyl, pheny, phenyl- substituted by lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, halogi roxy, or nitro, furyl, pyrrolyl, quinolyl, pyrimidyl, thienyl or imidazolyl;
R, Ri and R2 are independently H, Ci_6 alkyl, Ci_6 aminoalkyl or
Figure imgf000034_0001
A is H, Ci-6 alkyl, Ci_6 aminoalkyl, amino, alkoxy, halo or CF3; and n is 0 to 4.
In the formula: pyridyl means 2-pyridyl, 3 -pyridyl and 4-pyridyl; halo means chloro, bromo, iodo, and fluoro groups; and amino means amino or an amino derivative such as -
— — C = NCH = CHCH = N
NH2, ~NH-C(NH2)-NH or
In a fifth embodiment, the compound is chloroquine or a chloroquine analog. Chloroquine (7-chloro-4-(4-diethylamino- 1 -methylbutylamino)quinolone),
Hydroxychloroquine (7-chloro-4-(4-ethyl-(2-hydroxyethyl)-amino- 1 - methylbutylamino)quinolone), and amodiaquine are also effective anti-ZIKA agents, as are analogs of chloroquine. Examples of such analogs include those described in U.S. Patent No. 6,479,504 and Solomon, V.R., et al. Design and synthesis of chloroquine analogs with anti- breast cancer property. Eur J Med Chem 45 (2010) 3916-3923. Representative chloroquine analogs include, but are not limited to:
Quinacrine;
7-hydroxy-4-(4-diethylamino- 1 -methylbutylamino)quinoline; chloroquine phosphate;
7-chloro-4-(4-diethylamino- 1 -butylamino)quinoline (desmethylchloroquine);
7-hydroxy-4-(4-diethylamino- 1 -butylamino)quinoline; 7-chloro-4-( 1 -carboxy-4-diethylamino- 1 -butylamino)quinoline; 7-hydroxy-4-( 1 -carboxy-4-diethylamino- 1 -butylamino)quinoline; 7-chloro-4-( 1 -carboxy-4-diethylamino- 1 -methylbutylamino)quinoline; 7-hydroxy-4-( 1 -carboxy-4-diethylamino- 1 -methylbutylamino)quinoline; 7-hydroxy-4-(4-ethyl-(2-hydroxyethyl)-amino-l-methylbutylamino)quinoline; hydroxychloroquine phosphate;
7-chloro-4-(4-ethyl-(2-hydroxyethyl)-amino-l-butylamino)quinoline
(desmethylhydroxychloroquine);
7-hydroxy-4-(4-ethyl-(2-hydroxyethyl)-amino-l-butylamino)quinoline;
7-chloro-4-(l-carboxy-4-ethyl-(2-hydroxyethyl)-amino-l-butylamino)quinoline ;
7-hydroxy-4-(l-carboxy-4-ethyl-(2-hydroxyethyl)-amino-l-butylamino)quinoline;
7-chloro-4-( 1 -carboxy-4-ethyl-(2-hydroxyethyl)-amino- 1 - methylbutylamino)quinoline;
7- hydroxy-4-( 1 -carboxy-4-ethyl-(2-hydroxyethyl)-amino- 1 - methylbutylamino)quinoline;
8- [(4-aminopentyl)amino]-6-methoxydihydrochloride quinoline; 1 -acetyl- 1 ,2,3 ,4-tetrahydroquinoline;
8-[4-aminopentyl)amino]-6-methoxyquinoline dihydrochloride; 1 -butyryl- 1 ,2,3 ,4-tetrahydroquinoline;
7-chloro-2-(o-chlorostyryl)-4-[4-diethylamino-l-methylbutyl]aminoquiinolin e phosphate;
3- chloro-4-(4-hydroxy-a,a'-bis(2-methyl-l-pyrrolidinyl)-2,5-xyl idinoquinoline,
4- [(4-diethylamino)-l-methylbutyl)amino]-6-methoxyquinoline; 3,4-dihydro-l (2H)-quinolinecarboxyaldehyde; Ι, Γ-pentamethylenediquinoleinium diiodide; and 8-quinolinol sulfate.
As with other compounds described herein, the compounds can exist in the form of diastereomeric mixtures, enantiomers and the like. Enantiomers of chloroquine and chloroquine analogs can be isolated, for example, according to the procedure of Stalcup, A. M. et al. (1996), Analytical Chemistry 68:2248-50.
In a sixth embodiment, the compound is an entry inhibitor. Several entry and/or adhesion factors, among which DC-SIGN, AXL, TYR03, and to a lesser extent, TIM-1, permit ZIKV entry, with a major role for the TAM receptor AXL (Hamel et al, "Biology of ZIKA Virus Infection in Human Skin Cells," Journal of Virology, March 2016, volume 90, issue 6).
To date, numerous entry inhibitors are in various stages of preclinical development, including SP-30 (Samaritan Pharmaceuticals, Las Vegas, NV, USA), PRO 206 (Progenies, Tarrytown, NY, USA), and REP 9C (REPLICor, Laval, QC, Canada) and multiple early compounds identified by large-scale screening. Takebe et al. (Uenishi et al. "Identification of novel small molecule HCV entry inhibitor that acts through CD81," 15th International Symposium on Hepatitis C and Related Viruses. San Antonio, Texas. 2008. Abstract # 83 : 64) recently performed an evaluation of 8,000 compounds for anti-HCV activity within the JFH-1 system and reported EC50 values ranging from 53 to 113 nM across the top four hits, with encouraging toxicology data demonstrating CC50 values of >35 μΜ.
Although the mechanism of action is not fully defined, it is believed that the anti- HCV activity is linked to interference with viral binding to the CD81 receptor. Although this study is in the early stages of development, it establishes the importance of CD81 in HCV infection and provides an excellent foundation for further studies designed to exploit the CD81 receptor as a target to inhibit viral replication.
Entry inhibitors for HIV infection which work through inhibition of DC-SIGN include those disclosed in Berzi, et al, (2012) A glycomimetic compound inhibits DC-SIGN- mediated HIV infection in cellular and cervical explant models. AIDS 26, 127-137, and in Mangold,et al, (2012) Quinoxalinoneinhibitors of the lectin DC-SIGN. Chem. Sci. 3, 772- 777.
One entry inhibitor specific for HCV (Baldick et al, A Novel Small Molecule Inhibitor of Hepatitis C Virus Entry," PLoS Pathog. 2010 Sep; 6(9)), which can also have activity against ZIKV, has the following structure:
Figure imgf000037_0001
EM
III. Stereoisomerism and Polymorphism
The compounds described herein may have asymmetric centers and occur as racemates, racemic mixtures, individual diastereomers or enantiomers, with all isomeric forms being included in the present invention. Compounds of the present invention having a chiral center can exist in and be isolated in optically active and racemic forms. Some compounds can exhibit polymorphism. The present invention encompasses racemic, optically -active, polymorphic, or stereoisomeric forms, or mixtures thereof, of a compound of the invention, which possess the useful properties described herein. The optically active forms can be prepared by, for example, resolution of the racemic form by recrystallization techniques, by synthesis from optically-active starting materials, by chiral synthesis, or by chromatographic separation using a chiral stationary phase or by enzymatic resolution. One can either purify the respective nucleoside, then derivatize the nucleoside to form the compounds described herein, or purify the nucleotides themselves.
Optically active forms of the compounds can be prepared using any method known in the art, including but not limited to by resolution of the racemic form by recrystallization techniques, by synthesis from optically-active starting materials, by chiral synthesis, or by chromatographic separation using a chiral stationary phase.
Examples of methods to obtain optically active materials include at least the following. i) physical separation of crystals: a technique whereby macroscopic crystals of the individual enantiomers are manually separated. This technique can be used if crystals of the separate enantiomers exist, i.e., the material is a conglomerate, and the crystals are visually distinct; ii) simultaneous crystallization: a technique whereby the individual enantiomers are separately crystallized from a solution of the racemate, possible only if the latter is a conglomerate in the solid state; iii) enzymatic resolutions: a technique whereby partial or complete separation of a racemate by virtue of differing rates of reaction for the enantiomers with an enzyme; iv) enzymatic asymmetric synthesis: a synthetic technique whereby at least one step of the synthesis uses an enzymatic reaction to obtain an enantiomerically pure or enriched synthetic precursor of the desired enantiomer; v) chemical asymmetric synthesis: a synthetic technique whereby the desired enantiomer is synthesized from an achiral precursor under conditions that produce asymmetry {i.e., chirality) in the product, which can be achieved using chiral catalysts or chiral auxiliaries; vi) diastereomer separations: a technique whereby a racemic compound is reacted with an enantiomerically pure reagent (the chiral auxiliary) that converts the individual enantiomers to diastereomers. The resulting diastereomers are then separated by chromatography or crystallization by virtue of their now more distinct structural differences and the chiral auxiliary later removed to obtain the desired enantiomer; vii) first- and second-order asymmetric transformations: a technique whereby diastereomers from the racemate equilibrate to yield a preponderance in solution of the diastereomer from the desired enantiomer or where preferential crystallization of the diastereomer from the desired enantiomer perturbs the equilibrium such that eventually in principle all the material is converted to the crystalline diastereomer from the desired enantiomer. The desired enantiomer is then released from the diastereomer; viii) kinetic resolutions: this technique refers to the achievement of partial or complete resolution of a racemate (or of a further resolution of a partially resolved compound) by virtue of unequal reaction rates of the enantiomers with a chiral, non-racemic reagent or catalyst under kinetic conditions; ix) enantiospecific synthesis from non-racemic precursors: a synthetic technique whereby the desired enantiomer is obtained from non-chiral starting materials and where the stereochemical integrity is not or is only minimally compromised over the course of the synthesis; x) chiral liquid chromatography: a technique whereby the enantiomers of a racemate are separated in a liquid mobile phase by virtue of their differing interactions with a stationary phase (including but not limited to via chiral HPLC). The stationary phase can be made of chiral material or the mobile phase can contain an additional chiral material to provoke the differing interactions; xi) chiral gas chromatography: a technique whereby the racemate is volatilized and enantiomers are separated by virtue of their differing interactions in the gaseous mobile phase with a column containing a fixed non-racemic chiral adsorbent phase; xii) extraction with chiral solvents: a technique whereby the enantiomers are separated by virtue of preferential dissolution of one enantiomer into a particular chiral solvent; xiii) transport across chiral membranes: a technique whereby a racemate is placed in contact with a thin membrane barrier. The barrier typically separates two miscible fluids, one containing the racemate, and a driving force such as concentration or pressure differential causes preferential transport across the membrane barrier. Separation occurs as a result of the non-racemic chiral nature of the membrane that allows only one enantiomer of the racemate to pass through.
Chiral chromatography, including but not limited to simulated moving bed chromatography, is used in one embodiment. A wide variety of chiral stationary phases are commercially available.
IV. Nucleotide Salt or Prodrug Formulations
In cases where compounds are sufficiently basic or acidic to form stable nontoxic acid or base salts, administration of the compound as a pharmaceutically acceptable salt may be appropriate. Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable salts are organic acid addition salts formed with acids, which form a physiological acceptable anion, for example, tosylate, methanesulfonate, acetate, citrate, malonate, tartarate, succinate, benzoate, ascorbate, a- ketoglutarate and a-glycerophosphate. Suitable inorganic salts can also be formed, including but not limited to, sulfate, nitrate, bicarbonate and carbonate salts.
Pharmaceutically acceptable salts can be obtained using standard procedures well known in the art, for example by reacting a sufficiently basic compound such as an amine with a suitable acid, affording a physiologically acceptable anion. Alkali metal (e.g., sodium, potassium or lithium) or alkaline earth metal (e.g. , calcium) salts of carboxylic acids can also be made.
The nucleotide prodrugs described herein can be administered to additionally increase the activity, bioavailability, stability or otherwise alter the properties of the nucleotide monophosphate.
A number of nucleotide prodrug ligands are known. In general, alkylation, acylation or other lipophilic modification of the monophosphate or other anolog of the nucleoside will increase the stability of the nucleotide.
Examples of substituent groups that can replace one or more hydrogens on the monophosphate moiety are alkyl, aryl, steroids, carbohydrates, including but not limited to sugars, 1,2-diacylglycerol and alcohols. Many are described in R. Jones & N. Bischofberger, Antiviral Research, 1995, 27, 1-17 and S.J. Hecker & M.D. Erion, J. Med. Chem., 2008, 51, 2328-2345. Any of these can be used in combination with the disclosed nucleotides to achieve a desired effect.
The active nucleotide can also be provided as a 5'-phosphoether lipid as disclosed in the following references, which are incorporated by reference: Kucera, L.S., N. Iyer, E. Leake, A. Raben, Modest E.K., D.L.W., and C. Piantadosi, "Novel membrane -interactive ether lipid analogs that inhibit infectious HIV-1 production and induce defective virus formation," AIDS Res. Hum. Retroviruses, 1990, 6, 491-501; Piantadosi, C, J. Marasco C.J., S.L. Morris-Natschke, K.L. Meyer, F. Gumus, J.R. Surles, K.S. Ishaq, L.S. Kucera, N. Iyer, C.A. Wallen, S. Piantadosi, and E.J. Modest, "Synthesis and evaluation of novel ether lipid nucleoside conjugates for anti-HIV activity," J. Med. Chem., 1991, 34, 1408-14; Hosteller, K.Y., D.D. Richman, D A. Carson, L.M. Stuhmiller, G.M. T. van Wijk, and H. van den Bosch, "Greatly enhanced inhibition of human immunodeficiency virus type 1 replication in CEM and HT4-6C cells by 3 '-deoxythymidine diphosphate dimyristoylglycerol, a lipid prodrug of 3,-deoxythymidine," Antimicrob. Agents Chemother., 1992, 36, 2025-29; Hostetler, K.Y., L.M. Stuhmiller, H.B. Lenting, H. van den Bosch, and D.D. Richman, "Synthesis and antiretroviral activity of phospholipid analogs of azidothymidine and other antiviral nucleosides." J. Biol. Chem., 1990, 265, 61127.
Nonlimiting examples of US patents that disclose suitable lipophilic substituents that can be covalently incorporated into the nucleoside, preferably at R2 and/or R3 position of the nucleotides described herein, or lipophilic preparations, include US Pat. Nos. 5, 149,794 (Yatvin et al); 5, 194,654 (Hostetler et al), 5,223,263 (Hostetler et al); 5,256,641 (Yatvin et al); 5,411,947 (Hostetler et al); 5,463,092 (Hostetler et al); 5,543,389 (Yatvin et al); 5,543,390 (Yatvin et al); 5,543,391 (Yatvin et al); and 5,554,728 (Basava et al), all of which are incorporated by reference. Foreign patent applications that disclose lipophilic substituents that can be attached to nucleosites of the present invention, or lipophilic preparations, include WO 89/02733, WO 90/00555, WO 91/16920, WO 91/18914, WO 93/00910, WO 94/26273, WO 96/15132, EP 0 350 287, EP 93917054.4, and WO 91/19721.
V. Methods of Treatment
Hosts, including but not limited to humans, infected with Zika virus or a gene fragment thereof, can be treated by administering to the patient an effective amount of the active compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug or salt thereof in the presence of a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent. The active materials can be administered by any appropriate route, for example, orally, parenterally, intravenously, intradermally, subcutaneously, or topically, in liquid or solid form.
VI. Combination or Alternation Therapy
In one embodiment, the compounds of the invention can be employed together with at least one other antiviral agent. Representative antiviral agents include entry inhibitors, reverse transcriptase inhibitors, protease inhibitors, and immune-based therapeutic agents.
For example, when used to treat or prevent Zika virus infection, the active compound or its prodrug or pharmaceutically acceptable salt can be administered in combination or alternation with another antiviral agent, including, but not limited to, those of the formulae above. In general, in combination therapy, effective dosages of two or more agents are administered together, whereas during alternation therapy, an effective dosage of each agent is administered serially. The dosage will depend on absorption, inactivation and excretion rates of the drug, as well as other factors known to those of skill in the art. It is to be noted that dosage values will also vary with the severity of the condition to be alleviated. It is to be further understood that for any particular subject, specific dosage regimens and schedules should be adjusted over time according to the individual need and the professional judgment of the person administering or supervising the administration of the compositions.
VIII. Pharmaceutical Compositions
Hosts, including but not limited to humans, infected with ZIKV can be treated by administering to the patient an effective amount of the active compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug or salt thereof in the presence of a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent. The active materials can be administered by any appropriate route, for example, orally, parenterally, intravenously, intradermally, subcutaneously, or topically, in liquid or solid form.
A preferred dose of the compound for will be in the range of between about 0.01 and about 10 mg/kg, more generally, between about 0.1 and 5 mg/kg, and, preferably, between about 0.5 and about 2 mg/kg, of body weight of the recipient per day. The effective dosage range of the pharmaceutically acceptable salts and prodrugs can be calculated based on the weight of the parent compound to be delivered. If the salt or prodrug exhibits activity in itself, the effective dosage can be estimated as above using the weight of the salt or prodrug, or by other means known to those skilled in the art.
The compound is conveniently administered in unit any suitable dosage form, including but not limited to but not limited to one containing 7 to 600 mg, preferably 70 to 600 mg of active ingredient per unit dosage form. An oral dosage of 5-400 mg is usually convenient.
The concentration of active compound in the drug composition will depend on absorption, inactivation and excretion rates of the drug as well as other factors known to those of skill in the art. It is to be noted that dosage values will also vary with the severity of the condition to be alleviated. It is to be further understood that for any particular subject, specific dosage regimens should be adjusted over time according to the individual need and the professional judgment of the person administering or supervising the administration of the compositions, and that the concentration ranges set forth herein are exemplary only and are not intended to limit the scope or practice of the claimed composition. The active ingredient can be administered at once, or can be divided into a number of smaller doses to be administered at varying intervals of time.
A preferred mode of administration of the active compound is oral. Oral compositions will generally include an inert diluent or an edible carrier. They can be enclosed in gelatin capsules or compressed into tablets. For the purpose of oral therapeutic administration, the active compound can be incorporated with excipients and used in the form of tablets, troches or capsules. Pharmaceutically compatible binding agents, and/or adjuvant materials can be included as part of the composition.
The tablets, pills, capsules, troches and the like can contain any of the following ingredients, or compounds of a similar nature: a binder such as microcrystalline cellulose, gum tragacanth or gelatin; an excipient such as starch or lactose, a disintegrating agent such as alginic acid, Primogel or corn starch; a lubricant such as magnesium stearate or Sterotes; a glidant such as colloidal silicon dioxide; a sweetening agent such as sucrose or saccharin; or a flavoring agent such as peppermint, methyl salicylate, or orange flavoring. When the dosage unit form is a capsule, it can contain, in addition to material of the above type, a liquid carrier such as a fatty oil. In addition, unit dosage forms can contain various other materials that modify the physical form of the dosage unit, for example, coatings of sugar, shellac, or other enteric agents.
The compound can be administered as a component of an elixir, suspension, syrup, wafer, chewing gum or the like. A syrup can contain, in addition to the active compound(s), sucrose as a sweetening agent and certain preservatives, dyes and colorings and flavors.
The compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug or salts thereof can also be mixed with other active materials that do not impair the desired action, or with materials that supplement the desired action, such as antibiotics, antifungals, antiinflammatories or other antiviral compounds. Solutions or suspensions used for parenteral, intradermal, subcutaneous, or topical application can include the following components: a sterile diluent such as water for injection, saline solution, fixed oils, polyethylene glycols, glycerine, propylene glycol or other synthetic solvents; antibacterial agents such as benzyl alcohol or methyl parabens; antioxidants such as ascorbic acid or sodium bisulfite; chelating agents, such as ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid; buffers, such as acetates, citrates or phosphates, and agents for the adjustment of tonicity, such as sodium chloride or dextrose. The parental preparation can be enclosed in ampoules, disposable syringes or multiple dose vials made of glass or plastic.
If administered intravenously, preferred carriers are physiological saline or phosphate buffered saline (PBS).
Transdermal Formulations
In some embodiments, the compositions are present in the form of transdermal formulations, such as that used in the FDA-approved agonist rotigitine transdermal (Neupro patch). Another suitable formulation is that described in U.S. Publication No. 20080050424, entitled "Transdermal Therapeutic System for Treating Parkinsonism." This formulation includes a silicone or acrylate-based adhesive, and can include an additive having increased solubility for the active substance, in an amount effective to increase dissolving capacity of the matrix for the active substance.
The transdermal formulations can be single-phase matrices that include a backing layer, an active substance-containing self-adhesive matrix, and a protective film to be removed prior to use. More complicated embodiments contain multiple-layer matrices that may also contain non-adhesive layers and control membranes. If a polyacrylate adhesive is used, it can be crosslinked with multivalent metal ions such as zinc, calcium, aluminum, or titanium ions, such as aluminum acetyl acetonate and titanium acetylacetonate.
When silicone adhesives are used, they are typically polydimethylsiloxanes. However, other organic residues such as, for example, ethyl groups or phenyl groups may in principle be present instead of the methyl groups. Because the active compounds are amines, it may be advantageous to use amine-resistant adhesives. Representative amine- resistant adhesives are described, for example, in EP 0 180 377.
Representative acrylate-based polymer adhesives include acrylic acid, acrylamide, hexylacrylate, 2-ethylhexylacrylate, hydroxyethylacrylate, octylacrylate, butylacrylate, methylacrylate, glycidylacrylate, methacrylic acid, methacrylamide, hexylmethacrylate, 2- ethylhexylmethacrylate, octylmethacrylate, methylmethacrylate, glycidylmethacrylate, vinylacetate, vinylpyrrolidone, and combinations thereof.
The adhesive must have a suitable dissolving capacity for the active substance, and the active substance most be able to move within the matrix, and be able to cross through the contact surface to the skin. Those of skill in the art can readily formulate a transdermal formulation with appropriate transdermal transport of the active substance.
Certain pharmaceutically acceptable salts tend to be more preferred for use in transdermal formulations, because they can help the active substance pass the barrier of the stratum corneum. Examples include fatty acid salts, such as stearic acid and oleic acid salts. Oleate and stearate salts are relatively lipophilic, and can even act as a permeation enhancer in the skin.
Permeation enhancers can also be used. Representative permeation enhancers include fatty alcohols, fatty acids, fatty acid esters, fatty acid amides, glycerol or its fatty acid esters, N-methylpyrrolidone, terpenes such as limonene, alpha-pinene, alpha- terpineol, carvone, carveol, limonene oxide, pinene oxide, and 1,8-eucalyptol.
The patches can generally be prepared by dissolving or suspending the active agent in ethanol or in another suitable organic solvent, then adding the adhesive solution with stirring. Additional auxiliary substances can be added either to the adhesive solution, the active substance solution or to the active substance-containing adhesive solution. The solution can then be coated onto a suitable sheet, the solvents removed, a backing layer laminated onto the matrix layer, and patches punched out of the total laminate.
Nanoparticulate Compositions
The compounds described herein can also be administered in the form of nanoparticulate compositions.
In one embodiment, the controlled release nanoparticulate formulations comprise a nanoparticulate active agent to be administered and a rate-controlling polymer which functions to prolong the release of the agent following administration. In this embodiment, the compositions can release the active agent, following administration, for a time period ranging from about 2 to about 24 hours or up to 30 days or longer. Representative controlled release formulations including a nanoparticulate form of the active agent are described, for example, in U.S. Patent No. 8,293,277.
Nanoparticulate compositions comprise particles of the active agents described herein, having a non-crosslinked surface stabilizer adsorbed onto, or associated with, their surface.
The average particle size of the nanoparticulates is typically less than about 800 nm, more typically less than about 600 nm, still more typically less than about 400 nm, less than about 300 nm, less than about 250 nm, less than about 100 nm, or less than about 50 nm. In one aspect of this embodiment, at least 50% of the particles of active agent have an average particle size of less than about 800, 600, 400, 300, 250, 100, or 50 nm, respectively, when measured by light scattering techniques.
A variety of surface stabilizers are typically used with nanoparticulate compositions to prevent the particles from clumping or aggregating. Representative surface stabilizers are selected from the group consisting of gelatin, lecithin, dextran, gum acacia, cholesterol, tragacanth, stearic acid, benzalkonium chloride, calcium stearate, glycerol monostearate, cetostearyl alcohol, cetomacrogol emulsifying wax, sorbitan esters, polyoxyethylene alkyl ethers, polyoxyethylene castor oil derivatives, polyoxyethylene sorbitan fatty acid esters, polyethylene glycols, polyoxyethylene stearates, colloidal silicon dioxide, phosphates, sodium dodecylsulfate, carboxymethylcellulose calcium, carboxymethylcellulose sodium, methylcellulose, hydroxyethylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethyl- cellulose phthalate, noncrystalline cellulose, magnesium aluminum silicate, triethanolamine, polyvinyl alcohol, polyvinylpyrrolidone, tyloxapol, poloxamers, poloxamines, poloxamine 908, dialkylesters of sodium sulfosuccinic acid, sodium lauryl sulfate, an alkyl aryl polyether sulfonate, a mixture of sucrose stearate and sucrose distearate, p- isononylphenoxypoly-(glycidol), SA90HCO, decanoyl-N-methylglucamide, n-decyl -D- glucopyranoside, n-decyl-D- maltopyranoside, n-dodecyl-D-glucopyranoside, n-dodecyl-D- maltoside, heptanoyl-N- methylglucamide, n-heptyl-D-glucopyranoside, n-heptyl-D- thioglucoside, n-hexyl-D- glucopyranoside, nonanoyl-N-methylglucamide, n-nonyl-D- glucopyranoside, octanoyl-N- methylglucamide, n-octyl-D-glucopyranoside, and octyl-D- thioglucopyranoside. Lysozymes can also be used as surface stabilizers for nanoparticulate compositions. Certain nanoparticles such as poly(lactic-co-glycolic acid) (PLGA)- nanoparticles are known to target the liver when given by intravenous (IV) or subcutaneously (SQ).
Because ZIKV can cause damage to, and is present in the liver, in one embodiment, the nanoparticles or other drug delivery vehicles are targeted to the liver. One such type of liver-targeted drug delivery vehicle is described in Park, et al, Mol Imaging. Feb 2011 ; 10(1): 69-77, and uses Glypican-3 (GPC3) as a molecular target. Park taught using this target for hepatocellular carcinoma (HCC), a primary liver cancer frequently caused by chronic persistent hepatitis.
In one aspect of this embodiment, this drug delivery vehicle is also used to target therapeutics to the liver to treat viral infections. Further, since the compounds described herein have anti-cancer uses, this type of system can target the compounds to the liver and treat liver cancers. GPC3 is a heparan sulfate proteoglycan that is not expressed in normal adult tissues, but significantly over-expressed in up to 80% of human HCC's. GPC3 can be targeted, for example, using antibody-mediated targeting and binding (See Hsu, et al, Cancer Res. 1997; 57:5179-84).
Another type of drug delivery system for targeting the liver is described in U.S. Patent No. 7,304,045. The '045 patent discloses a dual-particle tumor or cancer targeting system that includes a first ligand-mediated targeting nanoparticle conjugated with galactosamine, with the ligand being on a target cell. The first nanoparticle includes poly(y- glutamic acid)/poly(lactide) block copolymers and n antiviral compound, which in this case is a compound described herein, and in the '045 patent, was gancyclovir. A second nanoparticle includes poly(y-glutamic acid)/poly(lactide) block copolymers, an endothelial cell-specific promoter, and a (herpes-simplex-virus)-(thymidine kinase) gene constructed plasmid, and provides enhanced permeability and retention-mediated targeting. The first and said second nanoparticles are mixed in a solution configured for delivering to the liver. When the disorder to be treated is a liver tumor or cancer, the delivery can be directly to, or adjacent to, the liver tumor or cancer.
Representative rate controlling polymers into which the nanoparticles can be formulated include chitosan, polyethylene oxide (PEO), polyvinyl acetate phthalate, gum arabic, agar, guar gum, cereal gums, dextran, casein, gelatin, pectin, carrageenan, waxes, shellac, hydrogenated vegetable oils, polyvinylpyrrolidone, hydroxypropyl cellulose (HPC), hydroxyethyl cellulose (HEC), hydroxypropyl methylcelluose (HPMC), sodium carboxymethylcellulose (CMC), poly(ethylene) oxide, alkyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose, methyl cellulose, carboxymethyl cellulose, hydrophilic cellulose derivatives, polyethylene glycol, polyvinylpyrrolidone, cellulose acetate, cellulose acetate butyrate, cellulose acetate phthalate, cellulose acetate trimellitate, polyvinyl acetate phthalate, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose phthalate, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose acetate succinate, polyvinyl acetaldiethylamino acetate, poly(alkylmethacrylate), poly(vinyl acetate), polymers derived from acrylic or methacrylic acid and their respective esters, and copolymers derived from acrylic or methacrylic acid and their respective esters.
Methods of making nanoparticulate compositions are described, for example, in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,518, 187 and 5,862,999, both for "Method of Grinding Pharmaceutical Substances;" U.S. Pat. No. 5,718,388, for "Continuous Method of Grinding Pharmaceutical Substances;" and U.S. Pat. No. 5,510, 118 for "Process of Preparing Therapeutic Compositions Containing Nanoparticles."
Nanoparticulate compositions are also described, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 5,298,262 for "Use of Ionic Cloud Point Modifiers to Prevent Particle Aggregation During Sterilization;" U.S. Pat. No. 5,302,401 for "Method to Reduce Particle Size Growth During Lyophilization;" U.S. Pat. No. 5,318,767 for "X-Ray Contrast Compositions Useful in Medical Imaging;" U.S. Pat. No. 5,326,552 for "Novel Formulation For Nanoparticulate X-Ray Blood Pool Contrast Agents Using High Molecular Weight Non-ionic Surfactants;" U.S. Pat. No. 5,328,404 for "Method of X-Ray Imaging Using Iodinated Aromatic Propanedioates;" U.S. Pat. No. 5,336,507 for "Use of Charged Phospholipids to Reduce Nanoparticle Aggregation;" U.S. Pat. No. 5,340,564 for Formulations Comprising Olin 10-G to Prevent Particle Aggregation and Increase Stability;" U.S. Pat. No. 5,346,702 for "Use of Non-Ionic Cloud Point Modifiers to Minimize Nanoparticulate Aggregation During Sterilization;" U.S. Pat. No. 5,349,957 for "Preparation and Magnetic Properties of Very Small Magnetic-Dextran Particles;" U.S. Pat. No. 5,352,459 for "Use of Purified Surface Modifiers to Prevent Particle Aggregation During Sterilization;" U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,399,363 and 5,494,683, both for "Surface Modified Anticancer Nanoparticles;" U.S. Pat. No. 5,401,492 for "Water Insoluble Non-Magnetic Manganese Particles as Magnetic Resonance Enhancement Agents;" U.S. Pat. No. 5,429,824 for "Use of Tyloxapol as a Nanoparticulate Stabilizer;" U.S. Pat. No. 5,447,710 for "Method for Making Nanoparticulate X-Ray Blood Pool Contrast Agents Using High Molecular Weight Non- ionic Surfactants;" U.S. Pat. No. 5,451,393 for "X-Ray Contrast Compositions Useful in Medical Imaging;" U.S. Pat. No. 5,466,440 for "Formulations of Oral Gastrointestinal Diagnostic X-Ray Contrast Agents in Combination with Pharmaceutically Acceptable Clays;" U.S. Pat. No. 5,470,583 for "Method of Preparing Nanoparticle Compositions Containing Charged Phospholipids to Reduce Aggregation;" U.S. Pat. No. 5,472,683 for "Nanoparticulate Diagnostic Mixed Carbamic Anhydrides as X-Ray Contrast Agents for Blood Pool and Lymphatic System Imaging;" U.S. Pat. No. 5,500,204 for "Nanoparticulate Diagnostic Dimers as X-Ray Contrast Agents for Blood Pool and Lymphatic System Imaging;" U.S. Pat. No. 5,518,738 for "Nanoparticulate NSAID Formulations;" U.S. Pat. No. 5,521,218 for "Nanoparticulate lododipamide Derivatives for Use as X-Ray Contrast Agents;" U.S. Pat. No. 5,525,328 for "Nanoparticulate Diagnostic Diatrizoxy Ester X-Ray Contrast Agents for Blood Pool and Lymphatic System Imaging;" U.S. Pat. No. 5,543, 133 for "Process of Preparing X-Ray Contrast Compositions Containing Nanoparticles;" U.S. Pat. No. 5,552, 160 for "Surface Modified NSAID Nanoparticles;" U.S. Pat. No. 5,560,931 for "Formulations of Compounds as Nanoparticulate Dispersions in Digestible Oils or Fatty Acids;" U.S. Pat. No. 5,565, 188 for "Polyalkylene Block Copolymers as Surface Modifiers for Nanoparticles;" U.S. Pat. No. 5,569,448 for "Sulfated Non-ionic Block Copolymer Surfactant as Stabilizer Coatings for Nanoparticle Compositions;" U.S. Pat. No. 5,571,536 for "Formulations of Compounds as Nanoparticulate Dispersions in Digestible Oils or Fatty Acids;" U.S. Pat. No. 5,573,749 for "Nanoparticulate Diagnostic Mixed Carboxylic Anydrides as X-Ray Contrast Agents for Blood Pool and Lymphatic System Imaging;" U.S. Pat. No. 5,573,750 for "Diagnostic Imaging X-Ray Contrast Agents;" U.S. Pat. No. 5,573,783 for "Redispersible Nanoparticulate Film Matrices With Protective Overcoats;" U.S. Pat. No. 5,580,579 for "Site-specific Adhesion Within the GI Tract Using Nanoparticles Stabilized by High Molecular Weight, Linear Poly(ethylene Oxide) Polymers;" U.S. Pat. No. 5,585, 108 for "Formulations of Oral Gastrointestinal Therapeutic Agents in Combination with Pharmaceutically Acceptable Clays;" U.S. Pat. No. 5,587,143 for "Butylene Oxide-Ethylene Oxide Block Copolymers Surfactants as Stabilizer Coatings for Nanoparticulate Compositions;" U.S. Pat. No. 5,591,456 for "Milled Naproxen with Hydroxypropyl Cellulose as Dispersion Stabilizer;" U.S. Pat. No. 5,593,657 for "Novel Barium Salt Formulations Stabilized by Non-ionic and Anionic Stabilizers;" U.S. Pat. No. 5,622,938 for "Sugar Based Surfactant for Nanocrystals;" U.S. Pat. No. 5,628,981 for "Improved Formulations of Oral Gastrointestinal Diagnostic X-Ray Contrast Agents and Oral Gastrointestinal Therapeutic Agents;" U.S. Pat. No. 5,643,552 for "Nanoparticulate Diagnostic Mixed Carbonic Anhydrides as X-Ray Contrast Agents for Blood Pool and Lymphatic System Imaging;" U.S. Pat. No. 5,718,388 for "Continuous Method of Grinding Pharmaceutical Substances;" U.S. Pat. No. 5,718,919 for "Nanoparticles Containing the R(- )Enantiomer of Ibuprofen;" U.S. Pat. No. 5,747,001 for "Aerosols Containing Beclomethasone Nanoparticle Dispersions;" U.S. Pat. No. 5,834,025 for "Reduction of Intravenously Administered Nanoparticulate Formulation Induced Adverse Physiological Reactions;" U.S. Pat. No. 6,045,829 "Nanocrystalline Formulations of Human Immunodeficiency Virus (HIV) Protease Inhibitors Using Cellulosic Surface Stabilizers;" U.S. Pat. No. 6,068,858 for "Methods of Making Nanocrystalline Formulations of Human Immunodeficiency Virus (HIV) Protease Inhibitors Using Cellulosic Surface Stabilizers;" U.S. Pat. No. 6, 153,225 for "Injectable Formulations of Nanoparticulate Naproxen;" U.S. Pat. No. 6, 165,506 for "New Solid Dose Form of Nanoparticulate Naproxen;" U.S. Pat. No. 6,221,400 for "Methods of Treating Mammals Using Nanocrystalline Formulations of Human Immunodeficiency Virus (HIV) Protease Inhibitors;" U.S. Pat. No. 6,264,922 for "Nebulized Aerosols Containing Nanoparticle Dispersions;" U.S. Pat. No. 6,267,989 for "Methods for Preventing Crystal Growth and Particle Aggregation in Nanoparticle Compositions;" U.S. Pat. No. 6,270,806 for "Use of PEG-Derivatized Lipids as Surface Stabilizers for Nanoparticulate Compositions;" U.S. Pat. No. 6,316,029 for "Rapidly Disintegrating Solid Oral Dosage Form," U.S. Pat. No. 6,375,986 for "Solid Dose Nanoparticulate Compositions Comprising a Synergistic Combination of a Polymeric Surface Stabilizer and Dioctyl Sodium Sulfosuccinate;" U.S. Pat. No. 6,428,814 for "Bioadhesive nanoparticulate compositions having cationic surface stabilizers;" U.S. Pat. No. 6,431,478 for "Small Scale Mill;" and U.S. Pat. No. 6,432,381 for "Methods for targeting drug delivery to the upper and/or lower gastrointestinal tract," all of which are specifically incorporated by reference. In addition, U. S. Patent Application No. 20020012675 Al, published on Jan. 31, 2002, for "Controlled Release Nanoparticulate Compositions," describes nanoparticulate compositions, and is specifically incorporated by reference.
The nanoparticle formulations including the compounds described herein, and also in the form of monophosphate prodrugs, and monophosphate, diphosphate, and triphosphate analogs, can be used to treat or prevent infections by flaviviruses, RSV, and influenza infections, and to treat or prevent certain types of cancers, including, but not limited to, liver cancer, acute myeloid leukemia, pancreatic cancer, lung cancer, ovarian cancer, colon cancer, rectal cancer, anal cancer, head and neck cancers, breast cancer, head and neck cancers, stomach cancer, some skin cancers, and other types of cancer described elsewhere herein that are treatable with anti-cancer nucleosides.
Amorphous small particle compositions are described, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 4,783,484 for "Particulate Composition and Use Thereof as Antimicrobial Agent;" U.S. Pat. No. 4,826,689 for "Method for Making Uniformly Sized Particles from Water- Insoluble Organic Compounds;" U. S. Pat. No. 4,997,454 for "Method for Making Uniformly-Sized Particles From Insoluble Compounds;" U.S. Pat. No. 5,741,522 for "Ultrasmall, Non-aggregated Porous Particles of Uniform Size for Entrapping Gas Bubbles Within and Methods;" and U.S. Pat. No. 5,776,496, for "Ultrasmall Porous Particles for Enhancing Ultrasound Back Scatter. "
Controlled Release Formulations
In a preferred embodiment, the active compounds are prepared with carriers that will protect the compound against rapid elimination from the body, such as a controlled release formulation, including but not limited to implants and microencapsulated delivery systems. Biodegradable, biocompatible polymers can be used, such as ethylene vinyl acetate, polyanhydrides, polyglycolic acid, collagen, polyorthoesters and polylactic acid. For example, enterically coated compounds can be used to protect cleavage by stomach acid. Methods for preparation of such formulations will be apparent to those skilled in the art. Suitable materials can also be obtained commercially.
Liposomal suspensions (including but not limited to liposomes targeted to infected cells with monoclonal antibodies to viral antigens) are also preferred as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. These can be prepared according to methods known to those skilled in the art, for example, as described in US Pat. No. 4,522,811 (incorporated by reference). For example, liposome formulations can be prepared by dissolving appropriate lipid(s) (such as stearoyl phosphatidyl ethanolamine, stearoyl phosphatidyl choline, arachadoyl phosphatidyl choline, and cholesterol) in an inorganic solvent that is then evaporated, leaving behind a thin film of dried lipid on the surface of the container. An aqueous solution of the active compound is then introduced into the container. The container is then swirled by hand to free lipid material from the sides of the container and to disperse lipid aggregates, thereby forming the liposomal suspension.
IX. General Schemes for Preparing Active Compounds
The terms used in describing the invention are commonly used and known to those skilled in the art. As used herein, the following abbreviations have the indicated meanings: aq aqueous
CDI carbonyldiimidazole
DMF N,N-dimethylformamide
DMSO dimethylsulfoxide
EDC 1 -ethyl-3 -(3 -dimethyllaminopropyl)carbodiimide hydrochloride
EtOAc ethyl acetate h hour/hours
HOBt N-hydroxybenzotriazole
M molar min minute rt or RT room temperature
TBAT tetrabutylammonium triphenyldifluorosilicate
TBTU O-(Benzotriazol- 1 -yl)-N,N,N',N'-tetramethyluronium tetrafluoroborate
THF tetrahydrofuran
Methods for the facile preparation of A^-hydroxycytidine nucleosides derivatives, modified monophosphate and phosphonates prodrugs analogs are also provided. N4- hydroxycytidine nucleosides derivatives, modified monophosphate and phosphonates prodrugs analogs disclosed herein can be prepared as described in detail below, or by other methods known to those skilled in the art. It will be understood by one of ordinary skill in the art that these schemes are in no way limiting and that variations of detail can be made without departing from the spirit and scope of the present invention.
The syntheses of Sofosbuvir and numerous other NS5B polymerase inhibitors are well understood and need not be discussed further herein. Certain of the compounds described herein include di-halogenated substitution at the 2' -position, and certain others include prodrugs and/or non-ribose sugars not found in Sofosbuvir. Exemplary synthetic schemes are provided below.
The various reaction schemes are summarized below.
Scheme 1 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, a synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrugs XX, XXI, XXII
Scheme 2 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, an alternate synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrugs XX, XXI, XXII.
Scheme 3 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, a synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrug XXIII.
Scheme 4 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, a synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrug XXIV.
Scheme 5 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, a synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrug XXV.
Scheme 6 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, an alternate synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrug XXV.
Scheme 7 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, a synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrug XXVI.
Scheme 8 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, an alternate synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrug XXVI. Scheme 9 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, a synthetic approach to nucleosides 27.
Scheme 10 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, an alternate synthetic approach to nucleosides 27.
Scheme 11 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, a synthetic approach to nucleosides 29 and 30.
Scheme 12 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, an alternate synthetic approach to nucleosides 30.
Scheme 13 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and, in particular, a synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrug 35.
Scheme 14 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and, in particular, a synthetic approach to A^-hydroxycytidine 2'-C-Me nucleoside 37.
Scheme 15 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and, in particular, a synthetic approach to A^-hydroxycytidine 2'-deoxy-2'- a-fluoro-2'-P-C-Me nucleoside 39.
Scheme 16 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and, in particular, a synthetic approach to N¥-(Octanoyloxy)cytidine - deoxy-2'-a-fluoro-2'-P-C-Me nucleoside 40.
Scheme 17 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and, in particular, a synthetic approach to A^-hydroxycytidine 2'-C-Me nucleoside prodrug 44.
Scheme 18 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and, in particular, a synthetic approach to A^-hydroxycytidine 2'-C-Me nucleoside prodrug 48.
Scheme 19 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and, in particular, a synthetic approach to A^-hydroxycytidine 2'-deoxy-2'- a-fluoro-2'-P-C-Me nucleoside prodrug 51. Scheme 20 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and, in particular, a synthetic approach to active compounds of the present invention, and, in particular, a synthetic approach to λ^-hydroxycytidine 2'-C-Me nucleoside prodrugs 54 and 56.
In one embodiment, nucleosides of formulas XX, XXI or XXII are prepared by protection of compound 1 by a group such as TIPS to provide 2 bearing a free alpha-hydroxyl group at the 3 '-position of the sugar (Scheme 1). Preparation of compound 1 is accomplished by one of ordinary skill in the art, by methods outlined in: (a) Rajagopalan, P.; Boudinot, F. D; Chu, C. K.; Tennant, B. C; Baldwin, B. H.; Antiviral Nucleosides: Chiral Synthesis and Chemotheraphy: Chu, C. K.; Eds. Elsevier: 2003. b) Recent Advances in Nucleosides: Chemistry and Chemotherapy: Chu, C. K.; Eds. Elsevier: 2002. c) Frontiers in Nucleosides & Nucleic Acids, 2004, Eds. R. F. Schinazi & D. C. Liotta, IHL Press, Tucker, GA, USA, pp: 319-37 d) Handbook of Nucleoside Synthesis: Vorbruggen H. & Ruh-Pohlenz C. John Wiley & sons 2001), and by general Schemes 9-10. Coupling of 2 with acids 3 or 4 can be accomplished by agents such as EDC, EDC/HOBt, TBTU, or CDI to give esters 5 or 6. After removal of protecting groups the resulting amino alcohols can be converted to the monophosphate prodrugs XX or XXI by exposure to phosphorous oxychloride or phosphorothioyl trichloride (POCl3 or PSCI3) or alternatively after water workup of the phosphorous oxychloride or phosphorothioyl trichloride reaction, a coupling agent such as DCC can be utilized in the formation of XX or XXI. Compound 7 can be obtained after water workup of the phosphorous oxychloride or phosphorothioyl trichloride reaction and subsequent exposure to phosgene or a phosgene equivalent such as CDI or triphosgene gives monophosphate prodrug XXII.
Figure imgf000056_0001
Scheme 1 A synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrugs XX, XXI, XXII. (Base is a nnaattuurraall oorr uunnnnaattuurraall nnuucclleeoside base: R4 , R5, R5 , R6, Y, M, R34, and R7 are as defined in active compound section)
Alternatively, monophosphate prodrugs XX, XXI, XXII can be synthesized as outlined in Scheme 2, namely nucleoside 1 can be converted to the monophosphate, 8 directly by the action of phosphorous oxychloride or phosphorothioyl trichloride in trimethyl phosphate. Coupling to the amino esters 9 or 10 can be accomplished with standard coupling agents such as DCC to give phosphoramidates 7 and 11. Deprotection and subsequent coupling of 7 or 11 with agents such as EDC, EDC/HOBt, TBTU, or CDI provides monophosphate prodrugs XX and XXI. Monophosphate prodrug XXII can be obtained from 7 as described in Scheme 1.
Figure imgf000057_0001
11
R4', R5, R5', R6, R7', and Base may contain suitable protection; Pr = protection
Figure imgf000057_0002
Scheme 2 An alternate synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrugs XX, XXI, XXII. (Base is a natural or unnatural nucleoside base; R4 , R5, R5 , R6, Y, M, R34, and R7 are as defined in active compound section)
Monophosphate prodrug XXIII can be prepared as outlined in Scheme 3 starting from phenol 12 (Scheme 3). Exposure of 12 to phosphorous oxychloride or phosphorothioyl trichloride provides 13, which is subsequently allowed to react with an amino ester 14 to give phosphoramidate 15. Nucleoside 1 can next be converted to monophosphate analog 16 by reaction of the 5 '-hydroxyl group with the chlorophosphorylamino propanoate, 15. Deprotection and subsequent coupling of 16 with agents such as EDC, EDC/HOBt, TBTU, or CDI provides monophosphate prodrugs XXIII.
Figure imgf000058_0001
protection
Scheme 3 A synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrug XXIII. (Base is a natural or
4 ' 5 5' 6 34 35 22 7'
unnatural nucleoside base; R , R , RJ , R°, Y, R , R , and R' are as defined in active compound section)
Monophosphate prodrug XXIV can be prepared by reaction of phenol 12 with phosphorous oxychloride or phosphorothioyl trichloride to provide diphenyl phosphorochloridate, 17 (Scheme 4). Nucleoside 1 can next be converted to an intermediate monophosphate analog by reaction of the 5'-hydroxyl group with the diphenyl phosphorochloridate, 17. Deprotection and subsequent ester formation with the 3'-hydroxyl group with agents such as EDC, EDC/HOBt, TBTU, or CDI followed by reesterification with R 5OH provides monophosphate prodrugs XXIV.
agent
Figure imgf000059_0001
(XXIV)
Scheme 4 A synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrug XXIV. (Base is a natural or
' 5 5' 6 35 7'
unnatural nucleoside base; R , R , R , R , Y, R , and R are as defined in active compound section)
Monophosphate prodrug XXV can be prepared by initial reaction of protected tryptophan 18 with protected amino acid 19 with coupling agents such as EDC, EDC/HOBt, TBTU, or CDI to give dipeptide 20 (Scheme 5). Removal of the amine protections gives then diamine 21 which can then be reacted with phosphorous oxychloride or phosphorothioyl trichloride to give the cyclic phosphorodiamidic chloride, 22. Nucleoside 1 can next be converted to a monophosphate analog by reaction of the 5'-hydroxyl group with the cyclic phosphorodiamidic chloride, 22. Deprotection and subsequent coupling of 22 with agents such as EDC, EDC/HOBt, TBTU, or CDI provides monophosphate prodrugs XXV.
Figure imgf000060_0001
Scheme 5 A synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrug XXV. (Base is a natural or
4 ' 5 5' 6 34 35 22 7'
unnatural nucleoside base; R , R , RJ , R°, Y, R , R , R", and R' are as defined in active compound section)
Alternatively, monophosphate prodrug XXV can be prepared from monophosphate analog 8 followed by coupling with dipeptide 20 (Scheme 6).
Figure imgf000060_0002
Scheme 6 An alternate synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrug XXV. (Base is a
4' 5 5' 6 34 35 22 7'
natural or unnatural nucleoside base; R , R , R , R , Y, R , R , R , and R are as defined in active compound section)
Monophosphate prodrug XXVI can be prepared by initial reaction of phosphoramidic dichloride 23 with nucleoside 1 (Scheme 7). Subsequent reaction of the produced intermediate with water, hydrogen sulfide, or an amine provides monophosphate analog 24 (Scheme 7). Exposure of the bis nucleophile 24 to phosgene or a phosgene equivalent such as CDI provides monophosphate prodrugs XXVI.
Figure imgf000061_0001
Scheme 7 A synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrug XXVI. (Base is a natural or unnatural nucleoside base; R4', R5, R5 , R6, Y, M, R34, R35, R22, and R7' are as defined in active compound section)
Alternatively, monophosphate prodrug XXVI (where M is not R) can be prepared by initial reaction of nucleoside 1 with phosphorous oxychloride or phosphorothioyl trichloride as shown in Scheme 8. Subsequent reaction of the produced intermediate with water or hydrogen sulfide followed by reaction with phosgene or a phosgene equivalent such as CDI provides monophosphate prodrugs XXVI. (Scheme 8).
Figure imgf000061_0002
R , Rs, Rs, R , R', and
Base may contain suitable protection
Scheme 8 An alternate synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrug XVIII. (Base is a
4' 5 5' 6 34 35 22 7'
natural or unnatural nucleoside base; R , R , R , R , Y, R , R , R , and R are as defined in active compound section)
Nucleoside 27 can be prepared by coupling sugar 26 with a protected or silylated pyrimidine base in the presence of Lewis acid such as TMSOTf. Deprotection of the 5' - hydroxyl gives nucleoside 27. (Scheme 9). 2) deprotection
Figure imgf000062_0001
26 R5, R5', R6, R6', R?, and 27
Base may contain suitable
protection; Pr = protection;
LG = OCOalkyl, OCOaryl,
OCOalkylaryl; Y = NH2 or OH
Scheme 9 A synthetic approach to nucleosides 27. (R4 , R5, R5 , R6, Y, A, and R7 are as defined in active compound section)
Alternatively, nucleoside 27 can be prepared from -halo or - hydroxy compound 28. For the case of -halo a protected or free pyrimidine base in the presence of a base such as triethyl amine or sodium hydride followed by deprotection would give nucleosides 27. For the case of -hydroxy a protected or free pyrimidine base in the presence of a Mitsunobu coupling agent such as diisopropyl azodicarboxylate followed by deprotection would give nucleosides 27 (Scheme 10).
Figure imgf000062_0002
28 R4', R5_ Κ5'_ R6 R6' R7 AND 27
Base may contain suitable
protection; Pr = protection;
X = halogen or OH; Y = NH2 or OH
Scheme 10 An alternate synthetic approach to nucleosides 27. (R4 , R5, R5 , R6, Y, R6 and R7 are as defined in active compound section)
A^-hydroxycytidine nucleosides 29 can be prepared by reaction of compound 28 with hydroxylamine (Scheme 11). Subsequent reaction with various acid chlorides provides coresponding A^-acyloxy derivatives 30.
Figure imgf000063_0001
28 29 30
sugar may contain
suitable protection
Scheme 11 Synthetic approach to nucleosides 29 and 30. (X3, X4, R1 and sugar are as defined in active compound section)
Alternatively, nucleoside 29 can be prepared by initial reaction of nucleoside 31 with phosphorous oxychloride and 1,2,4-triazole or methylimidazole as shown in scheme 12. Subsequent reaction of the produced intermediate with hydroxylamine followed by deprotection of the sugar moiety gives nucleoside 29.
Figure imgf000063_0002
31 3) deprotection 2g
X3, X4 and sugar may
contain suitable protection
Scheme 12 An alternate synthetic approach to nucleosides 29. (X3, X4, R1 and sugar are as defined in active compound section)
Monophosphate prodrug 35 can be prepared by initial reaction of an appropriately protected hydroxylamine derivative with nucleoside 32 (Scheme 13). Subsequent reaction of 33 with phosphoramidate chloride 34 followed by necessary deprotection provides monophosphate prodrug 35.
Figure imgf000064_0001
32 33 34
X3, X4, R4', R5, R5', R6, R6' R7, R!
1) coupling may contain suitable
2) deprotection protection; Pr = protection
Figure imgf000064_0002
Scheme 13 Approach to monophosphate prodrug 35. (X3, X4, Y, R4', R5, R5 , R6, Y, R34, R35, R22, and R7' are as defined in active compound section)
Figure imgf000064_0003
Scheme 14. Synthesis of N -hydroxycytidine 2'-C-Me nucleoside 37 l-((2R,3R,4R,5R)-3,4-dihydroxy-5-(hydroxymethyl)-3-methyltetrahydrofuran-.
(hydroxyamino)pyrimidin-2(lH)-one 37
Figure imgf000064_0004
Scheme 15. Synthesis of A^-hydroxycytidine 2'-deoxy-2'-a-fluoro-2'-P-C-Me nucleoside 39
Figure imgf000065_0001
Scheme 16. Synthesis of N4-(Octanoyloxy)cytidine 2'-deoxy-2'-a-fluoro-2'-P-C-Me nucleoside 40
l-((2R, 3R, 4R,5R)-3-fluoro-4-hydroxy-5-(hydroxymethyl)-3-methyltetrahydrofuran-2-yl^ ((octanoyloxy)amino)pyrimidin-2(lH)-one 40
Figure imgf000065_0002
44
Scheme 17. Synthesis of N4-hydroxycytidine 2'-C-Me nucleoside prodrug 44
Figure imgf000065_0003
Scheme 18. Synthesis of N4-hydroxycytidine 2'-C-Me nucleoside prodrug 48
Figure imgf000066_0001
51
Scheme 19. Synthesis of A^-hydroxycytidine 2'-deoxy-2'-a-fluoro-2'-P-C-Me nucleoside prodrug 51
Figure imgf000066_0002
Figure imgf000066_0003
56
Scheme 20. Synthesis of N4-hydroxycytidine 2'-C-Me nucleoside prodrugs 54 and 56
Methods for the facile preparation of active compounds of Formulas 1A and IB are known in the art and result from the selective combination known methods. The compounds disclosed herein can be prepared as described in detail below, or by other methods known to those skilled in the art. It will be understood by one of ordinary skill in the art that variations of detail can be made without departing from the spirit and in no way limiting the scope of the present invention.
The various reaction schemes are summarized below.
Scheme 2 1 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, a synthetic approach to nucleosides 1.
Scheme 22 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, an alternate synthetic approach to nucleosides 1.
Scheme 23 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, a synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrugs I.
Scheme 24 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, a synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrugs IV, V and VI.
Scheme 25 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, a synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrugs VII.
Scheme 26 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, a synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrugs VIII.
Compounds of formula 1A can be prepared by first preparing nucleosides 1C, which in turn can be accomplished by one of ordinary skill in the art, using methods outlined in: (a) Rajagopalan, P.; Boudinot, F. D; Chu, C. K.; Tennant, B. C; Baldwin, B. H.; Antiviral Nucleosides: Chiral Synthesis and Chemotheraphy: Chu, C. K.; Eds. Elsevier: 2003. b) Recent Advances in Nucleosides: Chemistry and Chemotherapy: Chu, C. K.; Eds. Elsevier: 2002. c) Frontiers in Nucleosides & Nucleic Acids, 2004, Eds. R. F. Schinazi & D. C. Liotta, IHL Press, Tucker, GA, USA, pp: 319-37 d) Handbook of Nucleoside Synthesis: Vorbruggen H. & Ruh-Pohlenz C. John Wiley & sons 2001), and by general Schemes 1-2. Specifically, nucleosides 1C can be prepared by coupling sugar 2C with a protected, silylated or free nucleoside base in the presence of Lewis acid such as TMSOTf. Deprotection of the 3'- and 5'- hydroxyls gives nucleoside 1C.
Figure imgf000068_0001
suitable protection; Pr = protection;
LG = OCOalkyl, OCOaryl, OCOalkylaryl;
Pi1 , Pi2, PI3, and R5 are as defined in active compound section
Scheme 21 A synthetic approach to nucleosides 1C. (Base and R are as defined in active compound section)
Compounds of Formula IB can be prepared using the same general reaction scheme, but using the following intermediate (Compound 3A) rather than Compound 2C as shown above:
Figure imgf000068_0002
(3A)
In the schemes described herein, if a nucleoside base includes functional groups that might interfere with, or be decomposed or otherwise converted during the coupling steps, such functional groups can be protected using suitable protecting groups. After the coupling step, protected functional groups, if any, can be deprotected.
Alternatively, nucleosides 1C can be prepared from -halo, -sulfonate or - hydroxy compounds 3B. For the case of -halo or -sulfonate a protected or free nucleoside base in the presence of a base such as triethyl amine or sodium hydride followed by deprotection would give nucleosides 1C. For the case of -hydroxy a protected or free nucleoside base in the presence of a Mitsunobu coupling agent such as diisopropyl azodicarboxylate followed by deprotection would give nucleosides 1C.
Figure imgf000069_0001
3B nucleoside base may contain 1C
suitable protection; Pr = protection;
X = halogen, sulfonate or OH;
R1, R2, R3, and R5 are as defined in active compound section
Scheme 22 An alternate synthetic approach to nucleosides 1C. (Base is defined in active compound section)
As with Scheme 21, intermediate Compound 4 A can be used instead of Compound
Figure imgf000069_0002
(4A)
In the case of C-nucleosides prepared from bases: 1)
Figure imgf000069_0003
Figure imgf000069_0004
, methods outlined in WO09132123, WO09132135, WO2011150288 and WO2011035250 can be used.
Monophosphate prodrugs I can be prepared as outlined in Scheme 3 starting from phenol 4B. Exposure of 4B to phosphorous oxychloride or phosphorothioyl trichloride provides 5A, which is subsequently allowed to react with an amino ester 6A to give phosphoramidate 7A. Nucleoside 1C can next be converted to monophosphate analog 8A by reaction of the 5'-hydroxyl group with the chlorophosphorylamino propanoate, 7 A. Removal of protecting groups from the base and/or sugar of, if present, provides monophosphate prodrugs I.
Figure imgf000070_0001
Scheme 23 A synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrugs I. (Base, R1, Y, R16, R17, and R18 are as defined in active compound section).
Nucleosides prepared using intermediate compounds 3A or 4A can be used instead of Compound 1C.
Monophosphate prodrugs IV can be prepared by reaction of substituted pyridine 9A with phosphorous oxychloride. The resulting intermediate can next be reacted with an ester of an L-amino acid 6A (Scheme 4) to give 11 A. Nucleoside 1C can next be converted to monophosphate analog IV by reaction of the 5'-hydroxyl group with the chlorophosphoryl substrate, 11 A. Removal of protecting groups, if necessary, provides monophosphate prodrugs IV. Utilizing a similar protocol with substitution of 6A by R15OH or 9A, monophosphate prodrugs V and VI can also be prepared.
Figure imgf000071_0001
Scheme 24 A synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrugs IV- VI. (Base, R1, R2,
3 5 16 17 18
R , R , R , R , and R are as defined in active compound section).
As discussed above, "suitable protection" includes protection of OH and amine moieties that are not involved in the coupling chemistry. The protecting groups, which include those described in Greene, et al, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis. John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 1991, can be removed following the coupling step.
Nucleosides prepared using intermediate compounds 3A or 4A can be used instead of Compound 1C.
Monophosphate prodrugs VII can be prepared by reaction of 12A with phosphorous oxychloride to give 13A (Scheme 5). Nucleoside 1C can next be converted to monophosphate analog VII by reaction of the 5'-hydroxyl group with the chlorophosphoryl substrate, 13A. Removal of protecting groups, if necessary, provides monophosphate prodrugs VII.
Figure imgf000072_0001
(VII)
Scheme 25 A synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrugs VII. (Base, R1, R2, R3, R5 and R19 are as defined in active compound section).
Nucleosides prepared using intermediate compounds 3A or 4A can be used instead of Compound 1C.
Monophosphate prodrugs VIII can be prepared by reaction of 14A with phosphorous oxychloride to give 15A (Scheme 6). Nucleoside 1C can next be converted to monophosphate analog VIII by reaction of the 5'-hydroxyl group with the chlorophosphoryl substrate, 15A. Removal of protecting groups, if necessary, provides monophosphate prodrugs VIII.
Figure imgf000073_0001
15A
Figure imgf000073_0002
(viii)
Scheme 26 A synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrugs VIII. (Base, R1, R2, R3, R5, and R21 are as defined in active compound section).
The prodrug formed in Scheme 6 is more stable than a non-cyclic phosphoramidate, and it is also less toxic than phosphoramidates containing an unsubstituted phenol moiety, by virtue of forming a non-toxic metabolite.
Nucleosides prepared using intermediate compounds 3A or 4A can be used instead of Compound 1C.
Methods for the facile preparation of active compounds of Formula A are known in the art and result from the selective combination known methods. The compounds disclosed herein can be prepared as described in detail below, or by other methods known to those skilled in the art. It will be understood by one of ordinary skill in the art that variations of detail can be made without departing from the spirit and in no way limiting the scope of the present invention.
The various reaction schemes are summarized below.
Scheme 27 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, a synthetic approach to nucleosides 1.
Scheme 28 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, an alternate synthetic approach to nucleosides 1. Scheme 29 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, a synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrugs I.
Compounds of formula A can be prepared by first preparing nucleosides 1, which in turn can be accomplished by one of ordinary skill in the art, using methods outlined in: (a) Rajagopalan, P.; Boudinot, F. D; Chu, C. K.; Tennant, B. C; Baldwin, B. H.; Antiviral Nucleosides: Chiral Synthesis and Chemotheraphy: Chu, C. K.; Eds. Elsevier: 2003. b) Recent Advances in Nucleosides: Chemistry and Chemotherapy: Chu, C. K.; Eds. Elsevier: 2002. c) Frontiers in Nucleosides & Nucleic Acids, 2004, Eds. R. F. Schinazi & D. C. Liotta, IHL Press, Tucker, GA, USA, pp: 319-37 d) Handbook of Nucleoside Synthesis: Vorbruggen H. & Ruh-Pohlenz C. John Wiley & sons 2001), and by general Schemes 1-2. Specifically, nucleosides 1 can be prepared by coupling sugar 2 with a protected, silylated or free nucleoside base in the presence of Lewis acid such as TMSOTf. Deprotection of the 3' - and 5'- hydroxyls gives nucleoside 1.
Figure imgf000074_0001
2 nucleoside base may contain 1
suitable protection; Pr = protection; X3 and X4 = CI or X3 and X4 = Br
LG = OCOalkyl, OCOaryl, OCOalkylaryl;
R1 , R2, R3 and R5 are as defined in active compound section
Scheme 27 A synthetic approach to nucleosides 1. (Base and R1 are as defined in active compound section)
In the schemes described herein, if a nucleoside base includes functional groups that might interfere with, or be decomposed or otherwise converted during the coupling steps, such functional groups can be protected using suitable protecting groups. After the coupling step, protected functional groups, if any, can be deprotected.
Alternatively, nucleosides 1 can be prepared from -halo, -sulfonate or - hydroxy compounds 3. For the case of -halo or -sulfonate a protected or free nucleoside base in the presence of a base such as triethyl amine or sodium hydride followed by deprotection gives nucleosides 1. For the case of -hydroxy a protected or free nucleoside base in the presence of a Mitsunobu coupling agent such as diisopropyl azodicarboxylate, in the presence of triphenyl phosphine, followed by deprotection gives nucleosides 1.
Figure imgf000075_0001
3 nucleoside base may contain 1 suitable protection; Pr = protection;
X = halogen, sulfonate or OH; X3 and X4 = CI or X3 and X4 = Br Ft1 , Ft2, Ft3, and R5 are as defined in active compound section
Scheme 28 An alternate synthetic approach to nucleosides 1. (Base is defined in active compound section)
In the case of C-nucleosides prepared from bases: 1)
Figure imgf000075_0002
and 2)
Figure imgf000075_0003
methods outlined in WO09132123, WO09132135, WO2011150288 and
WO2011035250 can be used.
Monophosphate prodrugs I can be prepared as outlined in Scheme 3 starting from a phenol such as 4. Exposure of 4 to phosphorous oxychloride or phosphorothioyl trichloride provides 5, which is subsequently allowed to react with an amino ester 6 to give phosphoramidate 7. Nucleoside 1 can next be converted to monophosphate analog 8 by reaction of the 5'-hydroxyl group with the chlorophosphorylamino propanoate, 7. Removal of protecting groups from the base and/or sugar of 8, if present, provides monophosphate prodrugs I.
Figure imgf000076_0001
X3 and X4 = CI or X3 and X4 = Br
Scheme 29 A synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrugs I. (Base, R1, Y, R16, R17, and R18 are as defined in the active compound section).
Methods for the facile preparation of active compounds of Formulas B and C are known in the art and result from the selective combination known methods. The compounds disclosed herein can be prepared as described in detail below, or by other methods known to those skilled in the art. It will be understood by one of ordinary skill in the art that variations of detail can be made without departing from the spirit and in no way limiting the scope of the present invention.
The various reaction schemes are summarized below.
Scheme 30 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, a synthetic approach to nucleosides 1.
Scheme 31 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, an alternate synthetic approach to nucleosides 1.
Scheme 32 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, a synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrugs I.
Scheme 33 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, a synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrugs IV, V and VI.
Scheme 34 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, a synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrugs VII. Scheme 35 is a non-limiting example of the synthesis of active compounds of the present invention, and in particular, a synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrugs VDI.
Compounds of Formula B can be prepared by first preparing nucleosides 1, which in turn can be accomplished by one of ordinary skill in the art, using methods outlined in: (a) Rajagopalan, P.; Boudinot, F. D; Chu, C. K.; Tennant, B. C; Baldwin, B. H.; Antiviral Nucleosides: Chiral Synthesis and Chemotheraphy: Chu, C. K. ; Eds. Elsevier: 2003. b) Recent Advances in Nucleosides: Chemistry and Chemotherapy: Chu, C. K.; Eds. Elsevier: 2002. c) Frontiers in Nucleosides & Nucleic Acids, 2004, Eds. R. F. Schinazi & D. C. Liotta, IHL Press, Tucker, GA, USA, pp: 319-37 d) Handbook of Nucleoside Synthesis: Vorbruggen H. & Ruh-Pohlenz C. John Wiley & sons 2001), and by general Schemes 1-2. Specifically, nucleosides 1 can be prepared by coupling sugar 2 with a protected, silylated or free nucleoside base in the presence of Lewis acid such as TMSOTf. Deprotection of the 3 '- and 5 '- hydroxyls gives nucleoside 1.
Figure imgf000077_0001
suitable protection; Pr = protection;
LG = OCOalkyl, OCOaryl, OCOalkylaryl;
Pt1 , R2, R3, and R5 are as defined in active compound section
Scheme 30 A synthetic approach to nucleosides 1. (Base are as defined in active compound section)
In the schemes described herein, if a nucleoside base includes functional groups that might interfere with, or be decomposed or otherwise converted during the coupling steps, such functional groups can be protected using suitable protecting groups. After the coupling step, protected functional groups, if any, can be deprotected.
Alternatively, nucleosides 1 can be prepared from -halo, -sulfonate or - hydroxy compounds 3. For the case of -halo or -sulfonate a protected or free nucleoside base in the presence of a base such as triethyl amine or sodium hydride followed by deprotection would give nucleosides 1. For the case of -hydroxy a protected or free nucleoside base in the presence of a Mitsunobu coupling agent such as diisopropyl azodicarboxylate followed by deprotection would give nucleosides 1.
Figure imgf000078_0001
3 nucleoside base may contain 1
suitable protection; Pr = protection;
X = halogen, sulfonate or OH;
R1 , R2, R3, and R5 are as defined in active compound section
Scheme 31 An alternate synthetic approach to nucleosides 1. (Base are as defined in active compound section)
In the case of C-nucleosides prepared from bases: 1)
Figure imgf000078_0002
Figure imgf000078_0003
methods outlined in WO09132123, WO09132135, WO2011150288 and WO2011035250 can be used.
Monophosphate prodrugs I can be prepared as outlined in Scheme 3 starting from phenol 4. Exposure of 4 to phosphorous oxychloride or phosphorothioyl trichloride provides 5, which is subsequently allowed to react with an amino ester 6 to give phosphoramidate 7. Nucleoside 1 can next be converted to monophosphate analog 8 by reaction of the 5'- hydroxyl group with the chlorophosphorylamino propanoate, 7. Removal of protecting groups from the base and/or sugar of, if present, provides monophosphate prodrugs I. nucleoside 1 may contain
s
Figure imgf000079_0001
uitable protection
Scheme 32 A synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrugs I. (Base, R1, R2, R3, R5, R16, R17, and R18 are as defined in active compound section).
Monophosphate prodrugs IV can be prepared by reaction of substituted pyridine 9 with phosphorous oxychloride. The resulting intermediate can next be reacted with an ester of an L-amino acid 6 (Scheme 4) to give 11. Nucleoside 1 can next be converted to monophosphate analog IV by reaction of the 5'-hydroxyl group with the chlorophosphoryl substrate, 11. Removal of protecting groups, if necessary, provides monophosphate prodrugs IV. Utilizing a similar protocol with substitution of 6 by R15OH or 9, monophosphate prodrugs V and VI could also be prepared.
Figure imgf000079_0002
Scheme 33 A synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrugs IV- VI. (Base, R1, R2,
3 5 16 17 18
R , R , R , R , and R are as defined in active compound section). Monophosphate prodrugs VII can be prepared by reaction of 12 with phosphorous oxychloride to give 13 (Scheme 5). Nucleoside 1 can next be converted to monophosphate analog VII by reaction of the 5'-hydroxyl group with the chlorophosphoryl substrate, 13. Removal of protecting groups, if necessary, provides monophosphate prodrugs VII.
Figure imgf000080_0001
(vii)
Scheme 34 A synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrugs VII. (Base, R1, R2, R3, R5and R19 are as defined in active compound section).
Monophosphate prodrugs VIII can be prepared by reaction of 14 with phosphorous oxychloride to give 15 (Scheme 6). Nucleoside 1 can next be converted to monophosphate analog VIII by reaction of the 5'-hydroxyl group with the chlorophosphoryl substrate, 15. Removal of protecting groups, if necessary, provides monophosphate prodrugs VIII.
Figure imgf000081_0001
Scheme 35 A synthetic approach to monophosphate prodrugs VIII. (Base, R1, R2, R3, R5, and R21 are as defined in active compound section).
The present invention will be better understood with reference to the following non- limiting examples.
Example 1:
Probing the ZIKV RDRP Active Site with Homology Modeling.
The ZIKV sequence from the Polynesian 2013 strain (UNIPROT - A0A024B7W1_9FLAV) was used to construct a homology model for the NS5 RNA- Dependent RNA polymerase (RDRP) using the SwissModel server (http://swissmodel.expasy.org/). SwissModel compares the input sequence to all available crystal structures as potential templates, and the ZIKV was found to be most similar to the RDRP of other flaviviridae - Dengue Fever Virus (DENV, pdbid 5DTO; 67.6% identical), West Nile Virus (WNV, pdbid 2HCS; 72.9% identical), and Japanese Encephalitis Virus (JEV, pdbid 4HDG; 70.2% identical). It is worth noting that the Hepatitis C Virus (HCV) RDRP was only 20% identical to the ZIKV sequence. The WNV and DENV RDRP lacked residues in the active site due to poor resolution, notably between the β3 - α16 motifs. JEV was therefore chosen as a structural template for the ZIKV RDRP homology model due to high degree of identity and completeness. To compare active sites, the JEV-derived homology model of the ZIKV RDRP was aligned to the Hepatitis C Virus (HCV) replication complex crystal structure with incoming Sofosbuvir-diphosphate (pdbid 4WTG). The ZIKV homology model positions the exact same residues around the 2' position as the HCV structure (Figures 1 A and IB).
As shown in Figures 1A and IB, there is significant conservation of residues in the active site between HCV, JEV, DENV, and ZIKV. Figure 1A provides a table of all HCV RDRP residues within 6 A of the incoming Sofosbuvir-diphosphate from crystal structure (4WTG) and their positional equivalent for JEV, DENV, and ZIKV homology model (derived from JEV) after structural alignment. Identical residues across the structures are highlighted in blue, similar residues are highlighted in green, and dissimilar residues are orange.
Figure IB is a 3D representation of the HCV RDRP active site showing the position of all residues near the incoming nucleotide. The RDRP backbone is provided as transparent grey ribbons, the RNA primentemplate are rendered as gold cartoons, and the incoming Sofosbuvir-diphosphate is indicated. The residues in the active site are colored according to the table in Figure 1 A, and residue substitutions between HCV and ZIKV are indicated.
As shown in these figures, there are minor, but similar, residue substitutions around the incoming nucleotide. LI 59, S226, and A281 are all involved in distant backbone contacts with the sugar ring (> 4.5 A), and these residues are predicted to be A159, G226, and G281 in ZIKV. F224 is positioned beneath the 4' CH in HCV, and this residue is replaced with a similarly hydrophobic and aromatic W224 in ZIKV. C316 is near the catalytic triad and contacts the preceding nucleotide near the 3ΌΗ, and this is predicted to be S316 in DENV, JEV, and ZIKV. The only major differences between ZIKV and HCV occur near the β and γ phosphate moieties for the incoming nucleotide (R222A and H223G), which is > 4 A from the 3ΌΗ. Due to the conservation of residues in contact with the sugar -base groups in the active site, it is reasonable to suspect nucleotide analogs that inhibit HCV will likewise inhibit ZIKV.
Example 2
Anti-Zika virus Assay: Propagation of ZIKV in Aedes albopictus C6/36 cells: C6/36 cells (ATCC) will be maintained in Dulbecco's modified Eagle's medium DMEM; Invitrogen) supplemented with 10% fetal bovine serum (FBS) at 28°C and 5% C02. ZIKV (MR 766 strain, ATCC) will be passed three times in C6/36 cells and infection progression will be monitored by flow cytometry. The same procedure will be performed for DENV-2 (positive control).
Another approach for culturing of the Zika virus, the following is recommended:
Media: Hyclone 199 with 5% FBS and 1% antibiotics
Infection: Seed a T-75 vented flask with 7x106 vero cells (http://www.atcc.org/products/all/CCL-81.aspx) the day prior to infection. Aspirate media, and quickly thaw one of the virus aliquots. Mix the virus (200 μΐ.) with 2.5 mL warm media to infect for 1 her at 37C, shaking every 15 min. Add 5.5 mL of warm media to the infection media (~8 mL) and harvest at d4 post infection. The virus was purchased from ATCC (http://www.atcc.org/Products/All/VR-84.aspx). This virus strain is MR766 which was isolated from a rhesus macaque in Uganda (1947). The company passages the virus in suckling mouse brain. Upon receiving the virus, Vero cells can be infected to make a master stock. The virus titer is 6.6 x 107 PFU/mL as determined via plaque assay.
Quantification of ZIKV by plaque assay:
Four different 10-fold dilutions of purified virus (from supernatants of infected C6/36 cells) can be spread onto monolayers of Vero or BFDC cells at 37°C for 2 hr to initiate binding to cells. A mix of nutriment solution with agar can be added. Cells can be maintained at 37°C for 6 days before the plaque assay.
Plaque counting (plaque forming unit - pfu/mL): the cells will be incubated with 3.7% formaldehyde and 0.1% crystal violet in 20% ethanol. Each virus stock (aliquots of 1 mL) are maintained at -80°C until use.
ZIKV infection of Vero, BHK or Huh7 cells for drug evaluation:
Vero, BFDC or Huh7 cells can be maintained in RPMI or DMEM supplemented with 10% FBS.
Vero, BFDC or Huh7 cells can be seeded in culture 96-well microplate at a density of 5,000 cells per well. Cells can be rinsed once with phosphate-buffered saline (PBS), and ZIKV diluted to the desired multiplicity of infection (MOI) can be added to the cells. Cells can be incubated for 24 h at 37°C. Next day, culture medium plus compounds are added to each well, and the cells can be incubated at 37°C and 5% C02 for the duration of the experiment (viral kinetics evaluation).
Vero or Huh7 cells can be incubated with the culture supernatant from uninfected C6/36 cells to serve as negative controls (mock-infected cells).
Real-Time PCR of ZIKV:
After 5 or 6 days (depending on the results of viral kinetics) in culture, total RNA purification can be performed using RNeasy 96 kit (Qiagen) and ZIKV and ribosomal RNA amplification (endogenous control) using Real-Time PCR assay (7900 HT Sequence Detection System, Applied Biosystems or LightCycler480, Roche). The Delta CT (ZIKV and rRNA), % inhibition, EC50, EC90, and CC50 can then be determined.
ZIKV Cytopathic Effect (CPE) Assay:
Vero, human neuroblastoma (U251) or Huh7 cells were exposed to the compounds at several concentrations immediately following infection with ZIKV (MOI = 0.01 for Vero and MOI = 0.5 for U251 or Huh7 cells) Puerto Rico strain (PRVABC59) to assess antiviral activity. Cell cytopathic effect (CPE) MTS assay (CellTiter 96® AQueous One Solution Cell Proliferation Promega kit, Promega) was measured four (Vero) or five (U251 or Huh7) days after compound addition to determine the levels of replication inhibition.
ZIKV real-time reverse transcription PCR assay.
Vero cells (10,000 cells/well) were infected with ZIKV PRVABC59 (MOI = 0.0001) two hours prior the addition of test compounds (400-25 μΜ) or control drug (at 20-1.25 μΜ). After a 5-day incubation, the total RNA was isolated from the cells with RNeasy kit (Qiagen). RNA was reverse transcribed into cDNA and amplified in a one-step RT-PCR multiplex reaction with LightCycler 480 RNA Master Hydrolysis Probe (Roche) using highly conserved sequences complementary to a 76 bp fragment from the ZIKV envelope gene (Lanciotti et al, 2008) and an endogenous control (TaqMan Ribosomal RNA Control Reagents; Applied Biosystems) by using the LightCycler 480 Instrument II (Roche).
References:
Kuno et al, Full-length sequencing and genomic characterization of Bagaza, Kedougou, and Zika viruses. Arch Virol. 152:687-696, 2007.
Haddow et al, Genetic Characterization of Zika Virus Strains: Geographic Expansion of the Asian Lineage. PLoS. 6: el477, 2012.
Hamel et al, Biology of Zika Virus Infection in Human Skin Cells. J. Virol; 89: 17, 2015.
Diagne et al, Potential of selected Senegalese Aedes spp. mosquitoes (Diptera: Culicidae) to transmit Zika virus. BMC Infect. Dis.15: 492, 2015.
Example 3
Assess Anti-Zika virus Activity and Cellular Toxicity of nucleoside derivatives, modified monophosphate and phosphonate prodrug analogs
i) Viruses: Stock virus can be prepared as described above. v) Cellular Toxicity Assays: Nucleoside and nucleoside monophosphate prodrugs can be evaluated for their potential toxic effects on P4/R5 cells, MT-2 cells and uninfected PHA- stimulated human PBM cell. Log-phase P4/R5, MT-2, and PHA-stimulated human PBM cells can be seeded at 5 x 103 to 5 x 104 cells/well in 96-well cell culture plates containing 10-fold serial dilutions of the test drug. The cultures can be incubated for 2-4 days, after which 3- (4,5-dimethylthiazol-2-yl)-2,5-diphenyltetrazolium bromide (MTT) dye solution (Promega, Madison, WI) can be added to each well and incubated overnight. The reaction can be stopped with stop solubilization solution (Promega, Madison, WI) and plates can be read at a wavelength of 570 nm. The median 50% cytotoxic concentration (CC50) can be determined from the concentration-response curve using the median effect method.
Example 4
Mitochondrial Toxicity Assays in HepG2 Cells: i) Effect of nucleoside and nucleoside monophosphate prodrugs on Cell Growth and Lactic Acid Production: The effect on the growth of HepG2 cells can be determined by incubating cells in the presence of 0 μΜ, 0.1 μΜ, 1 μΜ, 10 μΜ and 100 μΜ drug. Cells (5 x 104 per well) can be plated into 12-well cell culture clusters in minimum essential medium with nonessential amino acids supplemented with 10% fetal bovine serum, 1% sodium pyruvate, and 1% penicillin/ streptomycin and incubated for 4 days at 37°C. At the end of the incubation period, the cell number can be determined using a hemocytometer. Also taught by Pan-Zhou X-R, Cui L, Zhou X-J, Sommadossi J-P, Darley-Usmer VM. "Differential effects of antiretroviral nucleoside analogs on mitochondrial function in HepG2 cells"Antimicrob. Agents Chemother. 2000; 44: 496-503. To measure the effects of the nucleoside analogs on lactic acid production, HepG2 cells from a stock culture can be diluted and plated in 12-well culture plates at 2.5 x 104 cells per well. Various concentrations (0 μΜ, 0.1 μΜ, 1 μΜ, 10 μΜ and 100 μΜ) of nucleoside analog can be added, and the cultures can be incubated at 37°C in a humidified 5% C02 atmosphere for 4 days. At day 4, the number of cells in each well can be determined and the culture medium collected. The culture medium can be filtered, and the lactic acid content in the medium determined using a colorimetric lactic acid assay (Sigma- Aldrich). Since lactic acid product can be considered a marker for impaired mitochondrial function, elevated levels of lactic acid production detected in cells grown in the presence of N4-hydroxycytidine nucleosides derivatives, modified monophosphate and phosphonates prodrugs analogs can be used to indicate a drug-induced cytotoxic effect.
ii) Effect on nucleosides derivatives, modified monophosphate and phosphonates prodrugs analogs on Mitochondrial DNA Synthesis: a real-time PCR assay to accurately quantify mitochondrial DNA content has been developed (see Stuyver LJ, Lostia S, Adams M, Mathew JS, Pai BS, Grier J, Tharnish PM, Choi Y, Chong Y, Choo H, Chu CK, Otto MJ, Schinazi RF. Antiviral activities and cellular toxicities of modified 2',3'-dideoxy-2',3'- didehydrocytidine analogs. Antimicrob. Agents Chemother. 2002; 46: 3854-60). This assay can be used in all studies described in this application that determine the effect of nucleoside analogs on mitochondrial DNA content. In this assay, low-passage-number HepG2 cells can be seeded at 5,000 cells/well in collagen-coated 96-well plates. Nucleoside monophosphate analogs can be added to the medium to obtain final concentrations of 0 μΜ, 0.1 μΜ, 10 μΜ and 100 μΜ. On culture day 7, cellular nucleic acids can be prepared by using commercially available columns (RNeasy 96 kit; Qiagen). These kits co-purify RNA and DNA, and hence, total nucleic acids are eluted from the columns. The mitochondrial cytochrome c oxidase subunit II (COXII) gene and the B-actin or rRNA gene can be amplified from 5 μΐ of the eluted nucleic acids using a multiplex Q-PCR protocol with suitable primers and probes for both target and reference amplifications. For COXII the following sense, probe and antisense primers can be used, respectively: 5'-TGCCCGCCATCATCCTA-3', 5'-tetrachloro-6- carboxyfluorescein-TCCTCATCGCCCTCCCATCCC-TAMRA-3' and 5'-
CGTCTGTTATGTAAAGGATGCGT-3'. For exon 3 of the β-actin gene (GenBank accession number E01094) the sense, probe, and antisense primers are 5'-GCGCGGCTACAGCTTCA- 3', 5'-6-FAMCACCACGGCCGAGCGGGATAMRA-3' and 5'- TCTCCTTAATGTC ACGC ACGAT-3 ', respectively. The primers and probes for the rRNA gene are commercially available from Applied Biosystems. Since equal amplification efficiencies can be obtained for all genes, the comparative CT method can be used to investigate potential inhibition of mitochondrial DNA synthesis. The comparative CT method uses arithmetic formulas in which the amount of target (COXII gene) is normalized to the amount of an endogenous reference (the B-actin or rRNA gene) and is relative to a calibrator (a control with no drug at day 7). The arithmetic formula for this approach is given by 2- AACT, where AACT is (CT for average target test sample - CT for target control) - (CT for average reference test -CT for reference control) (see Johnson MR, K Wang, JB Smith, MJ Heslin, RB Diasio. Quantitation of dihydropyrimidine dehydrogenase expression by real-time reverse transcription polymerase chain reaction. Anal. Biochem. 2000; 278: 175-184). A decrease in mitochondrial DNA content in cells grown in the presence of drug indicates mitochondrial toxicity.
Hi) Electron Microscopic Morphologic Evaluation: NRTI induced toxicity has been shown to cause morphological changes in mitochondria (e.g., loss of cristae, matrix dissolution and swelling, and lipid droplet formation) that can be observed with ultrastructural analysis using transmission electron microscopy (see Cui L, Schinazi RF,
Gosselin G, Imbach JL. Chu CK, Rando RF, Revankar GR, Sommadossi JP. Effect of enantiomeric and racemic nucleoside analogs on mitochondrial functions in HepG2 cells.
Biochem. Pharmacol. 1996, 52, 1577-1584; Lewis W, Levine ES, Griniuviene B, Tankersley
KO, Colacino JM, Sommadossi JP, Watanabe KA, Perrino FW. Fialuridine and its metabolites inhibit DNA polymerase gamma at sites of multiple adjacent analog incorporation, decrease mtDNA abundance, and cause mitochondrial structural defects in cultured hepatoblasts. Proc Natl Acad Sci U S A. 1996; 93 : 3592-7; Pan-Zhou XR, L Cui, XJ
Zhou, JP Sommadossi, VM Darley-Usmar. Differential effects of antiretroviral nucleoside analogs on mitochondrial function in HepG2 cells. Antimicrob. Agents Chemother. 2000, 44,
496-503). For example, electron micrographs of HepG2 cells incubated with 10 μΜ fialuridine (FIAU; l,2'-deoxy-2'-fluoro-l-D-arabinofuranosly-5-iodo-uracil) can show the presence of enlarged mitochondria with morphological changes consistent with mitochondrial dysfunction. To determine if nucleoside and nucleoside monophosphate prodrugs promoted morphological changes in mitochondria, HepG2 cells (2.5 x 104 cells/mL) can be seeded into tissue cultures dishes (35 by 10 mm) in the presence of 0 μΜ, 0.1 μΜ, 1 μΜ, 10 μΜ and 100 μΜ nucleoside analog. At day 8, the cells can be fixed, dehydrated, and embedded in Eponas described previously. Thin sections can be prepared, stained with uranyl acetate and lead citrate, and then examined using transmission electron microscopy.
Example 5
Mitochondrial Toxicity Assays in Neurol A Cells
To estimate the potential of nucleoside analogs to cause neuronal toxicity, mouse Neuro2A cells (American Type Culture Collection 131) can be used as a model system (see Ray AS, Hernandez- Santiago BI, Mathew JS, Murakami E, Bozeman C, Xie MY, Dutschman GE, Gullen E, Yang Z, Hurwitz S, Cheng YC, Chu CK, McClure H, Schinazi RF, Anderson KS. Mechanism of anti-human immunodeficiency virus activity of beta-D-6- cyclopropylamino-2',3'-didehydro-2',3'-dideoxyguanosine. Antimicrob. Agents Chemother. 2005, 49, 1994-2001). The concentrations necessary to inhibit cell growth by 50% (CC50) can be measured using the 3-(4,5-dimethyl-thiazol-2-yl)-2,5-diphenyltetrazolium bromide dye- based assay, as described. Perturbations in cellular lactic acid and mitochondrial DNA levels at defined concentrations of drug can be carried out as described above. In all experiments, ddC and AZT can be used as control nucleoside analogs.
Example 6
Effect of Nucleotide Analogs on the DNA Polymerase and Exonuclease Activities of Mitochondrial DNA Polymerase γ i) Purification of Human Polymerase γ: The recombinant large and small subunits of polymerase γ can be purified as described previously (see Graves SW, Johnson AA, Johnson KA. Expression, purification, and initial kinetic characterization of the large subunit of the human mitochondrial DNA polymerase. Biochemistry. 1998, 37, 6050-8; Johnson AA, Tsai Y, Graves SW, Johnson KA. Human mitochondrial DNA polymerase holoenzyme: reconstitution and characterization. Biochemistry 2000; 39: 1702-8). The protein concentration can be determined spectrophotometrically at 280 nm, with extinction coefficients of 234,420, and 71,894 M-1 cm-1 for the large and the small subunits of polymerase γ, respectively. ii) Kinetic Analyses of Nucleotide Incorporation: Pre-steady-state kinetic analyses can be carried out to determine the catalytic efficiency of incorporation (k/K) for DNA polymerase γ for nucleoside-TP and natural dNTP substrates. This allows determination of the relative ability of this enzyme to incorporate modified analogs and predict toxicity. Pre- steady-state kinetic analyses of incorporation of nucleotide analogs by DNA polymerase γ can be carried out essentially as described previously (see Murakami E, Ray AS, Schinazi RF, Anderson KS. Investigating the effects of stereochemistry on incorporation and removal of 5-fluorocytidine analogs by mitochondrial DNA polymerase gamma: comparison of D- and L-D4FC-TP. Antiviral Res. 2004, 62, 57-64; Feng JY, Murakami E, Zorca SM, Johnson AA, Johnson KA, Schinazi RF, Furman PA, Anderson KS. Relationship between antiviral activity and host toxicity: comparison of the incorporation efficiencies of 2',3'-dideoxy-5- fluoro-3'-thiacytidine-triphosphate analogs by human immunodeficiency virus type 1 reverse transcriptase and human mitochondrial DNA polymerase. Antimicrob Agents Chemother. 2004, 48, 1300-6). Briefly, a pre-incubated mixture of large (250 nM) and small (1.25 mM) subunits of polymerase γ and 6 OnM DNA template/primer in 50mM Tris-HCl, 100 mM NaCl, pH 7.8, can be added to a solution containing MgCl2 (2.5 mM) and various concentrations of nucleotide analogs. Reactions can be quenched and analyzed as described previously. Data can be fit to the same equations as described above. iii) Assay for Human Polymerase γ 3' 5' Exonuclease Activity: The human polymerase γ exonuclease activity can be studied by measuring the rate of formation of the cleavage products in the absence of dNTP. The reaction can be initiated by adding MgCl2
(2.5mM) to a pre-incubated mixture of polymerase γ large subunit (40nM), small subunit
(270nM), and l,500nM chain-terminated template/primer in 50mM Tris-HCl, lOOmM NaCl, pH 7.8, and quenched with 0.3M EDTA at the designated time points. All reaction mixtures can be analyzed on 20% denaturing polyacrylamide sequencing gels (8M urea), imaged on a
Bio-Rad GS-525 molecular image system, and quantified with Molecular Analyst (Bio-Rad).
Products formed from the early time points were plotted as a function of time. Data can be fitted by linear regression with Sigma Plot (Jandel Scientific). The slope of the line can be divided by the active enzyme concentration in the reaction to calculate the kexo for exonuclease activity (see Murakami E, Ray AS, Schinazi RF, Anderson KS. Investigating the effects of stereochemistry on incorporation and removal of 5-fluorocytidine analogs by mitochondrial DNA polymerase gamma: comparison of D- and L-D4FC-TP. Antiviral Res.
2004; 62: 57-64; Feng JY, Murakami E, Zorca SM, Johnson AA, Johnson KA, Schinazi RF,
Furman PA, Anderson KS. Relationship between antiviral activity and host toxicity: comparison of the incorporation efficiencies of 2',3'-dideoxy-5-fluoro-3'-thiacytidine- triphosphate analogs by human immunodeficiency virus type 1 reverse transcriptase and human mitochondrial DNA polymerase. Antimicrob Agents Chemother. 2004; 48: 1300-6).
Example 7
Assay for Bone Marrow Cytotoxicity
Primary human bone marrow mononuclear cells can be obtained commercially from Cambrex Bioscience (Walkersville, MD). CFU-GM assays can be carried out using a bilayer soft agar in the presence of 50 units/mL human recombinant granulocyte/macrophage colony- stimulating factor, while BFU-E assays use a methylcellulose matrix containing 1 unit/mL erythropoietin (see Sommadossi JP, Carlisle R. Toxicity of 3 '-azido-3'-deoxythymidine and 9-(l,3-dihydroxy-2-propoxymethyl) guanine for normal human hepatopoietic progenitor cells in vitro. Antimicrob. Agents Chemother. 1987; 31 : 452-454; Sommadossi, JP, Schinazi, RF, Chu, CK, and Xie, MY. Comparison of Cytotoxicity of the (-) and (+) enantiomer of 2',3'- dideoxy-3'-thiacytidine in normal human bone marrow progenitor cells. Biochem. Pharmacol. 1992; 44: 1921-1925). Each experiment was performed in duplicate in cells from three different donors. AZT can be used as a positive control. Cells can be incubated in the presence of the compound for 14-18 days at 37°C with 5% C02, and colonies of greater than 50 cells can be counted using an inverted microscope to determine IC5o- The 50% inhibitory concentration (IC50) can be obtained by least-squares linear regression analysis of the logarithm of drug concentration versus BFU-E survival fractions. Statistical analysis can be performed with Student's t test for independent non-paired samples.
Example 8
Cytotoxicity assay
The toxicity of the compounds can be assessed in Vero, human PBM, CEM (human lymphoblastoid), and can be assessed in MT-2, and HepG2 cells, as described previously (see Schinazi R.F., Sommadossi J. -P., Saalmann V., Cannon D.L., Xie M.-Y., Hart G.C., Smith G.A. & Hahn E.F. Antimicrob. Agents Chemother. 1990, 34, 1061-67). Cycloheximide can be included as positive cytotoxic control, and untreated cells exposed to solvent can be included as negative controls. The cytotoxicity (IC50) can be obtained from the concentration- response curve using the median effective method described previously (see Chou T.-C. & Talalay P. Adv. Enzyme Regul. 1984, 22, 27-55; Belen'kii M.S. & Schinazi R.F. Antiviral Res. 1994, 25, 1-11). Example 9
Synthesis of Nucleoside analog triphosphates
Nucleoside analog triphosphates can be synthesized from suitably protected nucleosides, using the Ludwig and Eckstein's method. (Ludwig J, Eckstein F. "Rapid and efficient synthesis of nucleoside 5'-0-(l-thiotriphosphates), 5'-triphosphates and 2',3'- cyclophosphorothioates using 2-chloro-4H-l,3,2-benzodioxaphosphorin-4-one" J. Org. Chem. 1989, 54 631-5) The crude nucleoside analog triphosphate can be purified, for example, by FPLC using a HiLoad 26/10 Q Sepharose Fast Flow Pharmacia column and gradient of TEAB buffer (pH 7.0). The product can be characterized by UV spectroscopy, proton and phosphorus NMR, mass spectroscopy and FIPLC.
The resulting triphosphates can be used as controls for the cellular pharmacology assays described above and for kinetic work with Zika virus polymerase and other viral and human polymerases.
Example 10
Phosphorylation Assay of Nucleoside to Active Triphosphate in HepG2 cells
To determine the cellular metabolism of the compounds, HepG2 cells can be obtained from the American Type Culture Collection (Rockville, MD), and are grown in 225 cm2 tissue culture flasks in minimal essential medium supplemented with non-essential amino acids, 1% penicillin-streptomycin. The medium can be renewed every three days, and the cells can be subcultured once a week. After detachment of the adherent monolayer with a 10 minute exposure to 30 mL of trypsin-EDTA and three consecutive washes with medium, confluent HepG2 cells can be seeded at a density of 2.5 x 106 cells per well in a 6-well plate and exposed to 10 μΜ of [ H] labeled active compound (500 dpm/pmol) for the specified time periods.
The cells are maintained at 37°C under a 5% C02 atmosphere. At the selected time points, the cells are washed three times with ice-cold phosphate-buffered saline (PBS).
Intracellular active compound and its respective metabolites are extracted by incubating the cell pellet overnight at -20°C with 60% methanol. The extracts are then combined, dried under gentle filtered air flow and stored at -20°C until HPLC analysis. Example 11
Bioavailability Assay in Cynomolgus Monkeys
The following procedure can be used to determine whether the compounds are bioavailable. Within 1 week prior to the study initiation, a cynomolgus monkey can be surgically implanted with a chronic venous catheter and subcutaneous venous access port (VAP) to facilitate blood collection and can undergo a physical examination including hematology and serum chemistry evaluations and the body weight recording. Each monkey (six total) receives approximately 250 μϋι' of H activity with each dose of active compound at a dose level of 10 mg/kg at a dose concentration of 5 mg/mL, either via an intravenous bolus (3 monkeys, IV), or via oral gavage (3 monkeys, PO). Each dosing syringe is weighed before dosing to gravimetrically determine the quantity of formulation administered. Urine samples are collected via pan catch at the designated intervals (approximately 18-0 hours pre- dose, 0-4, 4-8 and 8-12 hours post-dosage) and processed. Blood samples are collected as well (pre-dose, 0.25, 0.5, 1,2, 3,6, 8, 12 and 24 hours post-dosage) via the chronic venous catheter and VAP or from a peripheral vessel if the chronic venous catheter procedure should not be possible. The blood and urine samples are analyzed for the maximum concentration (Cmax), time when the maximum concentration is achieved (TmaX), area under the curve (AUC), half-life of the dosage concentration (TV,), clearance (CL), steady state volume and distribution (Vss) and bioavailability (F).
Example 12
Cell Protection Assay (CPA)
The assay can be performed essentially as described by Baginski, S. G.; Pevear, D. C; Seipel, M.; Sun, S. C. C; Benetatos, C. A.; Chunduru, S. K.; Rice, C. M. and M. S. Collett "Mechanism of action of a pestivirus antiviral compound" PNAS USA 2000, 97 (14), 7981 - 7986. MDBK cells (ATCC) are seeded onto 96-well culture plates (4,000 cells per well) 24 hours before use. After infection with BVDV (strain NADL, ATCC) at a multiplicity of infection (MOI) of 0.02 plaque forming units (PFU) per cell, serial dilutions of test compounds are added to both infected and uninfected cells in a final concentration of 0.5% DMSO in growth medium. Each dilution is tested in quadruplicate. Cell densities and virus inocula are adjusted to ensure continuous cell growth throughout the experiment and to achieve more than 90% virus-induced cell destruction in the untreated controls after four days post-infection. After four days, plates are fixed with 50% TCA and stained with sulforhodamine B. The optical density of the wells is read in a microplate reader at 550 nm.
The 50% effective concentration (EC50) values are defined as the compound concentration that achieved 50% reduction of cytopathic effect of the virus.
Example 13
Plaque Reduction Assay
For a given compound, the effective concentration can be determined in duplicate 24- well plates by plaque reduction assays. Cell monolayers are infected with 100 PFU/well of virus. Then, serial dilutions of test compounds in MEM supplemented with 2% inactivated serum and 0.75% of methyl cellulose are added to the monolayers. Cultures are further incubated at 37°C for 3 days, then fixed with 50% ethanol and 0.8% Crystal Violet, washed and air-dried. Then plaques are counted to determine the concentration to obtain 90% virus suppression.
Example 14
Yield Reduction Assay
For a given compound, the concentration to obtain a 6 -log reduction in viral load can be determined in duplicate 24-well plates by yield reduction assays. The assay is performed as described by Baginski, S. G.; Pevear, D. C; Seipel, M.; Sun, S. C. C; Benetatos, C. A.; Chunduru, S. K.; Rice, C. M. and M. S. Collett "Mechanism of action of a pestivirus antiviral compound" PNAS USA 2000,97 (14), 7981 -7986, with minor modifications.
Briefly, MDBK cells are seeded onto 24-well plates (2 x 105 cells per well) 24 hours before infection with BVDV (NADL strain) at a multiplicity of infection (MOI) of 0.1 PFU per cell. Serial dilutions of test compounds are added to cells in a final concentration of 0.5%
DMSO in growth medium. Each dilution is tested in triplicate. After three days, cell cultures
(cell monolayers and supernatants) are lysed by three freeze-thaw cycles, and virus yield is quantified by plaque assay. Briefly, MDBK cells are seeded onto 6-well plates (5 x 105 cells per well) 24 h before use. Cells are inoculated with 0.2 mL of test lysates for 1 hour, washed and overlaid with 0.5% agarose in growth medium. After 3 days, cell monolayers are fixed with 3.5% formaldehyde and stained with 1% crystal violet (w/v in 50% ethanol) to visualize plaques. The plaques are counted to determine the concentration to obtain a 6 -log reduction in viral load.
Example 15
Sulfasalazine, an FDA approved anti-inflammatory drug, can also be used, either alone or in combination, for preventing, treating and curing Zika and Dengue virus infections. The inventors have generated data demonstrating that this compound can inhibit these viruses in culture selectively at micromolar concentrations, with no toxicity up to 100 μΜ. Approved in 1950, sulfasalazine (Azulfidine) is commonly used to treat ulcerative colitis and rheumatoid arthritis when administered as delayed-release tablets (Azulfidine EN-tabs).
Anti-Dengue activity was shown in a model using a DENV-2 replicon, where % inhibition at 30 μΜ was 77.4%, and the EC50 was 8.3 μΜ. In a DENV-2 Huh-7 infectious assay, the EC50 was 22.2 μΜ, and the EC90 was 61.9 μΜ. In a DENV-2 VERO infectious assay, the EC50 was >100 μΜ.
West Nile virus activity was shown using a WNV replicon, where % inhibition at 30 μΜ was 78.5%. The EC50 was 9.9 μΜ and the EC90 was 78.3 μΜ.
Toxicity in baby hamster kidney (BHK) cells was > 100 μΜ, so the compounds can be effective at a safe concentration.
When the following compound
Figure imgf000094_0001
was used as a control, the EC50 was 2.6 μΜ (Huh-7) and 8.6 (Vero) μΜ.
With respect to Norovirus and HCV, no effect was observed, up to 100 μΜ
Sulfasalazine also has activity in DENV-2-Huh infectious system, with an EC50 of
22.2 μΜ and an EC90 of 61.9 μΜ. However, it was not active in Vero cells with an EC50 >
100 μΜ (< 1% inhibition). Sulfasalazine also has activity against West Nile Virus in a WNV replicon model, with an EC50 = 9.9 μΜ and EC90 = 78.3 μΜ.
Sulfasalazine also has activity with an EC50 = 8.3 μΜ, and with no signs of toxicity in BHK up to 100 μΜ.
Sulfasalazine showed activity against Dengue (DENV2) and WNV at 30 μΜ, where the percent inhibition against DENV2 was 77.4 and the percent inhibition against WNV was 78.5.
Sulfasalazine is known to cross into the placenta (to concentrations equal to maternal plasma), and is safe for a woman to take while pregnant. Sulfasalazine also crosses the blood brain barrier. In terms of a therapeutic window, sulfasalazine is extraordinarily safe, as doses of up to 4g / day can be taken without side effects (see, for example, Schroder and Campbell, Clinical Pharmacology and Therapeutics, 13(4): 539-551 (1972)). In terms of pharmacokinetic properties, sulfasalazine has generally safe plasma levels (6-50 μg/ml, which equates to 15-125 μΜ). Accordingly, the compound is safe at in vivo concentrations greater than those required to inhibit flaviviruses like ZIKV, DENV, and WNV.
Example 16
In Vitro Data in a Vero Cell Model
At 8 AM on Day 1, 10,000 cells/well were plated in a 96 well plate. At 2 PM, MOI 0.1 Zika virus was added. At 3 PM, virus inoculum was removed, and various concentrations of drug-containing medium was added, at multiple concentrations (duplicates of 10, 1, 0.1, 0.01 μΜ).
On Day 3, supernatants were harvested, and frozen for later RT-PCR confirmation. Cells were harvested, stained with 4G2 antibody, and intracellular virus was quantified with FACS. The EC50 EC90 were then calculated.
Concentrations of 10, 1, 0.1, 0.01 μΜ were assayed in duplicate for 10 total drugs. All cells were harvested, but the only cells stained with antibody were those contacted with the following compounds, in the listed concentrations:
Figure imgf000096_0001
All others only 10 μΜ
If > 30 % inhibition was observed at 10 μΜ, all doses for stored cells were stained with antibody and the EC50 EC90 was calculated.
MOI 0.1 results in ~ 41 % of uninfected and Zika-infected Vero cells at Day 3 are shown in Figures 2 A and 2B. All gates were established using uninfected cells as a control, and were maintained for all test conditions. The data showed that 40.8 percent of the cells were infected.
Figures 3 A-D show the results of treatment with a compound of the formula:
Figure imgf000096_0002
at concentrations of 10 μΜ, 1 μΜ, 0.1 μΜ and 0.01 μΜ, respectively. The percent inhibition was 57%, 35%, 5%, and 0%, respectively.
Figures 4A-D show the results of treatment with a compound of the formula:
Figure imgf000097_0001
at concentrations of 10 μΜ, 1 μΜ, 0.1 μΜ and 0.01 μΜ, respectively. The percent inhibition was 83%, 73%>, 59%>, and 21%>, respectively.
Figures 5 A-H show the results of treatment with compounds of the formulas:
Figure imgf000097_0002
at concentrations of 10 μΜ. The percent inhibition was 91, 64, 80, 65, 80, 76, 65, and 46%>, respectively. It therefore appears that pyrimidine and purine nucleoside compounds that are active for DENV and/or HCV also demonstrate some potency against Zika virus infection, though at relatively higher concentrations.
Of all the drugs tested, the following inhibitors demonstrated inhibition of 75-83 % at 10 μΜ, without apparent toxicity.
Figure imgf000098_0001
The data is shown in the tables below:
Table 1
Figure imgf000098_0002
Figure imgf000099_0001
Figure imgf000100_0001
Figure imgf000101_0001
Figure imgf000102_0001
An assay was also performed (data not shown) on Zika-infected Hofbauer cells (HC) obtained from humans. The activity of those compounds tested at 10 μΜ in HC is similar to that observed with Vero cells. In conclusion, several NS5B polymerase inhibitory compounds active against HCV are also active against Zika at concentrations below levels at which they are toxic.
Table 2. Anti-ZIKV activity of sulfasalazine (SSZ) in three cells types: No pretreat versus pretreat
Figure imgf000102_0002
*Cells were pretreated with SSZ or control 1 for 18-20 h before infection. Control 1 = beta- D-2'-C-Me-2-amino-7-fluoro-7-deazapurine ribose
Effect of Combination of Sulfasalazine (SSZ) with control 1 on ZIKV replication in Vero cells by using ZIKV CPE assay. Vero cells were pretreated for 18-20 h with SSZ (fixed concentrations of 300, 200 or 100 μΜ) plus control 1 (10, 5, 2.5 and 0.25 μΜ) prior to infection with MOI 0.01 PRVABC59 (drugs were replenished right after infection). The drug combinations were performed as follow:
• Sulfasalazine alone (400, 200, 100, and 50 μΜ).
• 300 μΜ Sulfasalazine + 10, 5, 2.5 and 0.25 μΜ Control 1.
• 200 μΜ Sulfasalazine + 10, 5, 2.5 and 0.25 μΜ Control 1.
• 100 μΜ Sulfasalazine + 10, 5, 2.5 and 0.25 μΜ Control 1.
• Control 1 alone (20, 10, 5, 2.5, 1.25 μΜ).
Drug-drug interactions were analyzed by using CalcuSyn (Biosoft, Ferguson, MO) computer software: 300, 200, and 100 μΜ SSZ in the presence of 10, 5, 2.5, and 0.25 μΜ of control 1 was evaluated versus each drug alone for each drug concentration. The interpretation of Combination Index (CI) values are as follows: Antagonism: CI value > 1.0, Additive effect: CI value = 1.0; Synergism: CI value = < 1.0.
SSZ or control 1 alone demonstrated EC50S of 210 μΜ and 5.4 μΜ, respectively [Fig.6A and 6B. Combination of 100 or 200 μΜ SSZ with Control 1 demonstrated nearly additive effect, with CI values = 1.0 to 1.4 at the lowest and highest concentrations of control 1 (0.25 and 10 μΜ) (Fig. 6C). The remaining combinations demonstrated CI values from 1.5 to 2.0, indicating slight to moderate antagonism.
All references referred to herein are hereby incorporated by reference for all purposes.
While certain exemplary embodiments of the invention have been described and shown in the accompanying drawings, it is to be understood that such embodiments are merely illustrative of and not restrictive on the broad invention, and that the embodiments of the invention not be limited to the specific constructions and arrangements shown and described, since various other modifications may occur to those ordinarily skilled in the art.

Claims

Claims
1. A method for treating a host infected with Zika, preventing an Zika infection, or reducing the biological activity of an Zika infection in a host, comprising administering an effective treatment or preventative amount of a NS5B polymerase inhibitor, sulfasalazine or a sulfasalazine analog, chloroquine or a chloroquine analog, or an entry inhibitor, to a patient in need of treatment or prevention thereof.
2. The method of Claim 1, wherein the NS5B polymerase inhibitor has one of the following formulas:
Figure imgf000104_0001
Formula A Formula B Formula C
Figure imgf000104_0002
Formula D wherein:
X1 is H, Ci-C6alkyl, C3-8 cycloalkyl, C3-8 cycloalkyl-Ci-6 alkyl, C3-8 cycloalkyl, C3-8 cycloalkyl-Ci-6 alkyl, Ci-C6haloalkyl, Ci-C6alkoxy, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, COR1, or COOR1;
X2 is hydrogen, Ci-C6alkyl, C3-8 cycloalkyl, C3-8 cycloalkyl-Ci-6 alkyl, Ci- C6haloalkyl, Ci-C6alkoxy, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, -OH, COR1, OCOR1, COOR1 or OCOOR1; each X3 and X4 is independently H, Ci_6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, halogen (F, CI, Br, I), H2, OH, SH, CN, or N02;
Y1 and Y2 are, independently, N, or C-X ,
R1 is independently CH2-0(CO)-X5; CH2-0(CO)0-X5, Ci-20 alkyl, the carbon chain derived from a fatty alcohol or Ci-2o alkyl substituted with a Ci-C6 alkyl, Ci-C6 alkoxy, di(Ci- C6 alkyl)-amino, C3-10 cycloalkyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl; wherein the substituents are C 1-5 alkyl, or C1-5 alkyl substituted with a Ci-C6 alkyl, Ci-C6 alkoxy, di(Ci-C6 alkyl)-amino, C3-10 cycloalkyl, or C3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl;
X5 is independently, Ci-2o alkyl, the carbon chain derived from a fatty alcohol or Ci-2o alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, alkoxy, C3-10 cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl; wherein the substituents are Ci-6 alkyl, or Ci-6 alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, Ci-6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, or C3-10 cycloalkyl,
Sugar is of Formula (II):
Figure imgf000105_0001
(II) wherein:
W is CL2 or CL2CL2, wherein L independently is selected from the group consisting of H, Ci-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, and C2-6 alkynyl, wherein Ci-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, and C2-6 alkynyl can each optionally contain one or more heteroatoms;
D is H, -QC R1, -CCC OR1, -C(0)N(R1)2, -C^SR1, -C(0)S(0)R1, -C^SOzR1, - SOR1 , -S02R1-S02OR1, ^((ThR1, -S(0)2N(R1)2, a diphosphate ester, a triphosphate ester, a phosphonate, a lipid, or stabilized phosphate prodrug; R1 is, independently, -CH2-0(CO)-X5; -CH2-0(CO)0-X5, Ci-20 alkyl, the carbon chain derived from a fatty alcohol or Ci-2o alkyl substituted with a Ci-C6 alkyl, alkoxy, di(Ci-C6 alkyl)-amino, C3-10 cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl; wherein the substituents are Ci-6 alkyl, or Ci-6 alkyl substituted with a Ci-C6 alkyl, Ci-C6 alkoxy, di(Ci-C6 alkyl)-amino, or C3-10 cycloalky;
X5 is independently, Ci-2o alkyl, the carbon chain derived from a fatty alcohol or Ci-2o alkyl substituted with a Ci-C6 alkyl, alkoxy, C3-10 cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl; wherein the substituents are Ci-6 alkyl, or Ci-6 alkyl substituted with a Ci-C6 alkyl, Ci-C6 alkoxy, di(Ci-C6 alkyl)-amino, or C3-10 cycloalkyl;
A is O, S, CH2, CHF, CF2, C=CH2, C=CHF, or C=CF2;
7' 4' 5 5' 6 6' 7'
and R' R" , R , RJ , R°, R° , and R' are independently selected from the group consisting of H, F, CI, Br, I, OH, SH, H2, HOH, HNH2, N3, C(0)OH, CN, CH2OH, C(0) H2, C(S) H2, C(0)OR, R, OR, SR, SSR, NHR, and NR2; with the proviso that there are not two NH2, OH, and/or SH moieties on the same carbon atom; and
Figure imgf000106_0001
3. The method of Claim 2, wherein the compounds are of Formula A.
4. The method of Claim 2, wherein the compounds are of Formula B.
5. The method of Claim 2, wherein A is O.
6. The method of Claim 2, wherein R4 and R7 are both H.
7. The method of Claim 2, wherein R6 or R6 is OH.
8. The method of Claim 2, wherein X2 is -OH, OCOR1, or OCOOR1.
9. The method of Claim 2, wherein R5 and R5 , are methyl and OH.
10. The method of Claim 2, wherein R5 and R5 , are methyl and F.
11. The method of Claim 2, wherein R5 and R5 are both halogens.
12. The method of Claim 1, wherein the compound has one of the following formulas:
Figure imgf000107_0001
The method of Claim 1, wherein the compound has the formula:
Figure imgf000108_0001
or analogs thereof where, at the 2'-position, the methyl group is replaced with CI, Br, or F.
14. The method of Claim 1, wherein the compounds have the following formula:
Figure imgf000108_0002
Formula A Formula B Formula C
Figure imgf000108_0003
Formula D
X1 is H, Ci-Cealkyl, C3-8 cycloalkyl, C3-8 cycloalkyl-Ci-6 alkyl, Ci-C6haloalkyl, Ci- C6alkoxy, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, COR1, or COOR1;
X2 is hydrogen, Ci-C6alkyl, C3-8 cycloalkyl, C3-8 cycloalkyl-Ci-6 alkyl, Ci- C6haloalkyl, Ci-C6alkoxy, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, -OH, COR1, OCOR1, COOR1 or OCOOR1; each X3 and X4 is independently H, Ci_6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, halogen (F, CI, Br, I), H2, OH, SH, CN, or N02;
Y1 and Y2 are, independently, N, or C-X ,
R1 is independently CH2-0(CO)-X5; CH2-0(CO)0-X5, Ci-20 alkyl, the carbon chain derived from a fatty alcohol or C1-20 alkyl substituted with a Ci-C6 alkyl, Ci-C6 alkoxy, di(Ci- C6 alkyl)-amino, C3-10 cycloalkyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl; wherein the substituents are C 1-5 alkyl, or C1-5 alkyl substituted with a Ci-C6 alkyl, Ci-C6 alkoxy, di(Ci-C6 alkyl)-amino, C3-10 cycloalkyl, or C3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl;
X5 is independently, Ci-2o alkyl, the carbon chain derived from a fatty alcohol or Ci-2o alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, alkoxy, C3-10 cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl; wherein the substituents are C i-6 alkyl, or Ci-6 alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, Ci-6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, or C3-10 cycloalkyl, and
Sugar is of the general Formulas (III) or (IV):
Figure imgf000109_0001
(III) (IV) wherein: Y is O or S;
Z is selected from the group consisting of CL2, CL2CL2, CL2OCL2, CL2SCL2, CL20, OCL2 and CL2 HCL2, wherein L independently is selected from the group consisting of H, F, Ci-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, and C2-6 alkynyl, wherein Ci-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, and C2-6 alkynyl can each optionally contain one or more heteroatoms; A is O, S, CH2, CHF, CF2, C=CH2, C=CHF, or C=CF2;
R4', R5, R5 , R6, R6', and R7' are independently selected from the group consisting of H, F, CI, Br, I, OH, SH, H2, HOH, HNH2, N3, C(0)OH, CN, CH2OH, C(0) H2, C(S) H2, C(0)OR, R, OR, SR, SSR, HR, and NR2;
Figure imgf000110_0001
wherein when A is O or S, R7 cannot be OH, SH, H2, NHOH, NHNH2, OR, SR, SSR, NHR, or NR2, and
R is independently a Ci-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, and C2-6 alkynyl, C -C6 cycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, or arylalkyl, wherein the groups are optionally substituted with one or more substituents as defined above, 24 is selected from the group consisting of OR15,
Figure imgf000110_0002
, and fatty alcohols,
R15 is selected from the group consisting of H, Li, Na, K, phenyl and pyridinyl; wherein phenyl and pyridinyl are optionally substituted with one to three substituents independently selected from the group consisting of (CH2)0-6CO2R16 and (CH2)0-6CON(R16)2;
R17 is selected from those groups occurring in natural L-amino acids, Ci-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, C -C6 cycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, or arylalkyl, wherein the groups are optionally substituted with one or more substituents as defined above,
R18 is H, Ci-2o alkyl, the carbon chain derived from a fatty alcohol or Ci-2o alkyl substituted with a Ci-C6 alkyl, Ci-C6 alkoxy, di(Ci-C6 alkyl)-amino, C -io cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl; wherein the substituents are C1-5 alkyl, or C1-5 alkyl substituted with a Ci-C6 alkyl, Ci-C6 alkoxy, di(Ci-C6 alkyl)-amino, C -io cycloalkyl, or cycloalkyl;
R2 and R3 are independently selected from the group consisting of: (a) OR where R is H, Li, Na, K, C1-20 alkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, Ci-6 haloalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, optionally substituted with one to three substituents independently selected from the group consisting of Ci-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, Ci-6 alkoxy, (CH2)o-6C02R9a, halogen, Ci-6 haloalkyl, -N(R9a Ci-6 acylamino, - HS02Ci-6 alkyl, -S02N(R9a)2, -S02Ci-6
alkyl, COR9b, nitro, cyano and
Figure imgf000111_0001
; wherein
R21 is as defined below;
R9a is independently H, Ci-2o alkyl, the carbon chain derived from a fatty alcohol or Ci-2o alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, Ci-6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, C3-10 cycloalkyl, C3- 10 cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl; wherein the substituents are C1-5 alkyl, or C1-5 alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, Ci-6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, C3-io cycloalkyl, or C3-io cycloalkyl alkyl;
R9b is -OR9a or -N(R9a)2;
Figure imgf000111_0002
(c) where R10a and R10b are:
(i) independently selected from the group consisting of H, Ci-10 alkyl, -(CH2)r R9a 2, Ci.6 hydroxyalkyl, -CH2SH, -(CH2)2S(0)pMe, -(CH2)3 HC(= H) H2, (lH-indol-3- yl)methyl, (lH-imidazol-4-yl)methyl, -(CH2)mCOR9b, aryl and aryl-Ci-3 alkyl, wherein said aryl groups are optionally substituted with a group selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, Ci-10 alkyl, Ci-6 alkoxy, halogen, nitro, and cyano;
(ii) R10a is H and R10b and R12 together are (CH2)2-4 to form a ring that includes the adjoining N and C atoms; (Hi) R a and R together are (CH2)nto form a ring;
(iv) R10a and R10b both are Ci-6 alkyl; or
(v) R10a is H and R10b is H, CH3, CH2CH3, CH(CH3)2, CH2CH(CH3)2, CH(CH3)CH2CH3, CH2Ph, CH2-indol-3-yl, -CH2CH2SCH3, CH2C02H, CH2C(0) H2, CH2CH2COOH, CH2CH2C(0) H2, CH2CH2CH2CH2 H2-CH2CH2CH2 HC( H) H2, CH2- imidazol-4-yl, CH2OH, CH(OH)CH3, CH2((4'-OH)-Ph), CH2SH, or C3-i0 cycloalkyl; p is 0 to 2; r is 1 to 6; n is 4 or 5; m is 0 to 3;
R11 is H, Ci-io alkyl, or Ci-io alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, Ci_6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, C -io cycloalkyl, C -io cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl; wherein the substituents are C 1-5 alkyl, or C1-5 alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, Ci-6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, C -io cycloalkyl, or C -io cycloalkyl alkyl;
R12 is H or Ci- alkyl, or R10a, or R10b and R12 together are (CH2)2-4 so as to form a ring that includes the adjoining N and C atoms;
(d) an O attached lipid (including a phospholipid), an N or O attached peptide, an O attached cholesterol, or an O attached phytosterol;
(e) R and R can come together to form a ring
Figure imgf000112_0001
is selected from the group consisting of phenyl or monocyclic heteroaryl, optionally substituted with one to three substituents independently selected from the group consisting of Ci-6 alkyl, CF3, C2-6 alkenyl, Ci-6 alkoxy, OR9c, C02R9a, COR9a, halogen, Ci-6 haloalkyl, -N(R9a)2, Ci-6 acylamino, C02N(R9a)2, SR9a, -NHS02Ci-6 alkyl, -S02N(R9a)2, -S02Ci-6 alkyl, COR9b, and cyano, and wherein said monocyclic heteroaryl and substituted monocyclic heteroaryl has 1 -2 heteroatoms that are independently selected from the group consisting of N, O, and S, with the provisos that: a) when there are two heteroatoms and one is O, then the other cannot be O or b) when there are two heteroatoms and one is S, then the other cannot be O or R9a is independently H or Ci_6 alkyl;
R9b is -OR9a or -N(R9a)2; R9c is H or Ci-6 acyl;
() R2 and R3 can come together to form a ring
Figure imgf000113_0001
where R30 is H, Ci_
20 alkyl, Ci-20 alkenyl, the carbon chain derived from a fatty alcohol or Ci-20 alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, Ci-6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, C3-10 cycloalkyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl; wherein the substituents are C1-5 alkyl, or C1-5 alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, Ci-6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, C3-10 cycloalkyl, or C3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl;
(g)
Figure imgf000113_0002
group consisting of H, Ci-10 alkyl, Ci-10 alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, Ci-6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, C3- 10 cycloalkyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl moiety; wherein the substituents are C1-5 alkyl, or C1-5 alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, Ci-6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, C3-10 cycloalkyl, or C3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl;
(h) R2 and R3 can come together to form a ring
Figure imgf000113_0003
where R14 is: (i) independently selected from the group consisting of H, C 1 -10 alkyl, -(CH2)r R2 a, Ci.6 hydroxyalkyl, -CH2SH, -(CH2)2S(0)pMe, -(CH2)3 HC(= H)NH2, (lH-indol-3- yl)methyl, (lH-imidazol-4-yl)methyl, -(CH2)mCOR9b, aryl, aryl-Ci- alkyl, heteroaryl, and heteroaryl-Ci- alkyl, wherein said aryl and heteroaryl groups are optionally substituted with a group selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, C1 -10 alkyl, Ci_6 alkoxy, halogen, nitro, and cyano;
(ii) R14 is H, CH3, CH2CH3, CH(CH3)2, CH2CH(CH3)2, CH(CH3)CH2CH3, CH2Ph, CH2-indol-3-yl, -CH2CH2SCH3, CH2C02H, CH2C(0) H2, CH2CH2COOH, CH2CH2C(0) H2, CH2CH2CH2CH2 H2, CH2CH2CH2 HC( H)NH2, CH2-imidazol-4-yl, CH2OH, CH(OH)CH3, CH2((4'-OH)-Ph), CH2SH, or C3-i0 cycloalkyl; p is 0 to 2; r is 1 to 6; m is 0 to 3
Q1 is R9a, O, or S
Q2 is Ci-io alkyl, Ci_6 hydroxyalkyl, aryl and aryl-Ci- alkyl, heteroaryl and heteroaryl- Ci- alkyl, said aryl and heteroaryl groups optionally substituted with a group selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, Ci-io alkyl, Ci_6 alkoxy, fluoro, and chloro;
R11 is H, Ci-io alkyl, Ci-io alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, Ci_6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, C -io cycloalkyl, C -io cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl moiety; wherein the substituents are C 1-5 alkyl, or Ci-5 alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, Ci-6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, C -io cycloalkyl, or C -io cycloalkyl alkyl;
12 14b 12
R is H or Ci- alkyl, or R and R together are (CH2)2-4 so as to form a ring that includes the adjoining N and C atoms;
(i) R2 and R3 can come together to form a ring selected from the group consisting of
Figure imgf000114_0001
where R is O or H and selected from the group consisting of H, C1-20 alkyl, C1-20 alkenyl, the carbon chain derived from a fatty acid, and C1-20 alkyl substituted with a Cw alkyl, Ci_6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, C3-10 cycloalkyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl; wherein the substituents are C1-5 alkyl, or Ci-5 alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, Ci_6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, C3-10 cycloalkyl, or C3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl, and
(j) R2 is a monophosphate ester or a diphosphate ester when R3 is OH, 0"K+, 0~Li+, or
0"Na+.
15. The method of Claim 14, wherein the compounds are of Formula A.
16. The method of Claim 14, wherein the compounds are of Formula B.
17. The method of Claim 14, wherein the sugar is of Formula III.
18. The method of Claim 17, wherein R2 is OR8 , where R8 is aryl, optionally substituted with one to three substituents independently selected from the group consisting of Ci-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, Ci-6 alkoxy, (CH2)o-6C02R9a, halogen, Ci-6 haloalkyl, - 9a)2, Ci.6 acylamino, - HS02Ci-6 alkyl, -S02N(R9a)2, -S02Ci-6 alkyl, COR9b, nitro, cyano
Figure imgf000115_0001
19. The method of Claim 17, wherein R3 is
20. The method of Claim 14, wherein A is O.
The method of Claim 14, wherein R4 and R7 are both H.
22. The method of Claim 14, wherein R6 or R6' is OH.
23. The method of Claim 14, wherein X2 is -OH, OCOR1, or OCOOR1.
24. The method of Claim 14, wherein R5 and R5 , are methyl and OH.
25. The method of Claim 14, wherein R5 and R5 , are methyl and F.
26. The method of Claim 14, wherein R5 and R5 are both halo.
27. The method of Claim 1, wherein the compounds have one of the following formulas:
Figure imgf000116_0001
Formula A Formula B Formula C
Figure imgf000116_0002
Formula D wherein:
X1 is H, Ci-Cealkyl, C3-8 cycloalkyl, C3-8 cycloalkyl-Ci-6 alkyl, Ci-C6haloalkyl, Ci- C6alkoxy, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, COR1, or COOR1;
X2 is hydrogen, Ci-C6alkyl, C3-8 cycloalkyl, C3-8 cycloalkyl-Ci-6 alkyl, Ci- C6haloalkyl, Ci-C6alkoxy, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, -OH, COR1, OCOR1, COOR1 or OCOOR1; each X3 and X4 is independently H, Ci_6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, aryl, alkylaryl, halogen (F, CI, Br, I), H2, OH, SH, CN, or N02;
Y1 and Y2 are, independently, N, or C-X ,
R1 is independently CH2-0(CO)-X5; CH2-0(CO)0-X5, Ci-20 alkyl, the carbon chain derived from a fatty alcohol or Ci-2o alkyl substituted with a Ci-C6 alkyl, Ci-C6 alkoxy, di(Ci- C6 alkyl)-amino, fluoro, C3-10 cycloalkyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl; wherein the substituents are C 1-5 alkyl, or Ci-5 alkyl substituted with a Ci-C6 alkyl, Ci-C6 alkoxy, di(Ci-C6 alkyl)-amino, fluoro, C3-10 cycloalkyl, or C3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl;
X5 is independently, Ci-2o alkyl, the carbon chain derived from a fatty alcohol or Ci-2o alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, alkoxy, C3-10 cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl; wherein the substituents are C i-6 alkyl, or Ci-6 alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, Ci-6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, fluoro, or C3-10 cycloalkyl, and
Sugar is of the general Formula (V):
Figure imgf000117_0001
(V) wherein:
D is H, C(0)R1, C(0)OR1, diphosphate ester, or triphosphate ester;
R1 is independently Ci-2o alkyl, the carbon chain derived from a fatty alcohol or Ci-2o alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, Ci-6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, fluoro, C3-10 cycloalkyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl; wherein the substituents are C1-5 alkyl, or C1-5 alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, Ci-6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, fluoro, C3-10 cycloalkyl, or C3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl; W is CL2 or CL2CL2, wherein L independently is selected from the group consisting of H, Ci-6 alkyl, C2 -6 alkenyl, and C2-6 alkynyl, wherein Ci-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, and C2-6 alkynyl can each optionally contain one or more heteroatoms;
A, R2, R3, Y, Z, R4', R5 , R6', and Rr are as defined above; wherein, when A is O or S, R7 cannot be OH, SH, H2, NHOH, HNH2, OR, SR, SSR, HR, and R2, wherein R is independently a Ci-C6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, or arylalkyl, wherein the groups are optionally substituted with one or more substituents as defined above, and wherein, when A is O or CH2, D is H or acyl, W is CH2, R4 and R7 are H, then, R5 and R6' cannot be H, halogen, OH, SH, OCH3, SCH3, NH2, HCH3, CH3, CH=CH2, CN, CH2 H2, CH2OH, or COOH, or the general Formula (VI):
Figure imgf000118_0001
wherein:
A, R2, R3, Y, Z, R4', R5 , R6', and R7' are as defined above; wherein, when A is O or S, R7 cannot be OH, SH, H2, NHOH, NHNH2, OR, SR, SSR, NHR, or NR2, wherein R is independently a Ci-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, or arylalkyl, wherein the groups can optionally be substituted with one or more substituents as defined above, or one of the general Formulas (VII), (VIII), (IX), and (X):
Figure imgf000119_0001
(VII) (νπΐ) (IX) (X) wherein:
D is H, C(0)R1, C(0)OR1, diphosphate ester, or triphosphate ester; V is, individually, S or Se;
R1 is independently C1 -20 alkyl, the carbon chain derived from a fatty alcohol or C1-20 alkyl substituted with a Ci-C6 alkyl, Ci-C6 alkoxy, di(Ci-C6 alkyl)-amino, fluoro, C3-10 cycloalkyl, C3 -10 cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl; wherein the substituents are C1 -5 alkyl, or C1-5 alkyl substituted with a Ci-C6 alkyl, Ci-C6 alkoxy, di(Ci-C6 alkyl)-amino, fluoro, C3-10 cycloalkyl, or C3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl; wherein D cannot be H or acyl, or one of the general formulas (XI), (ΧΠ), (XIII), and (XIV):
Figure imgf000119_0002
(XI) (ΧΠ) (XIII) (XIV) wherein:
V is, individually, S or Se;
R2, R3, Y, and Z are as defined above, or the general Formula (XV):
Figure imgf000120_0001
(XV) wherein:
R2, R3, and Y are as defined above: and
R30 is selected from the group consisting of C1 -20 alkyl, C2-20 alkyl, C2-20 alkenyl, C2-20 alkynyl, C3 -10 cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, and alkylaryl. or one of the general Formulas (XVI) or (XVII):
Figure imgf000120_0002
(XVI) (XVII) wherein:
R2, R3, Z, and Y are as defined above:
Y2 is O, S, Se, or R:
R is, independently, a Ci-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl; C2-C6 alkynyl, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, or aiylalkyl, wherein the groups are optionally substituted with one or more substituents as defined above,
R31, R31 ' and R32 are H, C¾, or CH2OR33; and
R33 is H or Ci-Ce acyl, or the general Formula (XVIII)
Figure imgf000121_0001
(XVIII) wherein:
D, W, R4', R5, R5 , R6, and R6' are as defined above;
R19 is H, F, CI, Br, I, N3, C(0)OH, CN, C(0)NH2, C(S)NH2, C(0)OR, or R; wherein R is independently Ci-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, or arylalkyl, wherein the groups are optionally substituted with one or more substituents as defined above, wherein, when D is H or acyl, W is CH2, R4' and R19 are H, then, R5, R5 , R6, R6' cannot be H, halogen, OH, SH, OCH3, SCH3, NH2, NHCH3, CH3, CH=CH2, CN, CH2NH2, CH2OH, or COOH, or the general formula (XIX):
Figure imgf000121_0002
(XIX) wherein:
R2, R3, R4', R5, R5 , R6, and R6', Y and Z are as defined above,
R19 is H, F, CI, Br, I, N3, C(0)OH, CN, C(0)NH2, C(S)NH2, C(0)OR, or R, and wherein R is independently Ci-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, or arylalkyl, wherein the groups are optionally substituted with one or more substituents as defined above, or one of the Formulas (XX), (XXI), or (XXII):
Figure imgf000122_0001
(XX) (XXI) (XXII) wherein:
A, R4', R5, R5 , R6, Y, and R7' are as defined above; R34 is Ci-C6 alkyl; M is O, S, or R; wherein R is, independently, Ci-C6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, C3-C6 cycloalkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, or arylalkyl, wherein the groups are optionally substituted with one or more substituents as defined above, or one of the Formulas (XXIII) or (XXIV):
Figure imgf000122_0002
(XXIII) (XXIV) wherein:
A, R4', R5, R5 , R6, Y, R34, and R7' are as defined above,
R35 is H, Ci-10 alkyl, Ci-10 alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, Ci-6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, fluoro, C3-10 cycloalkyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl moiety; wherein the substituents are C1-5 alkyl, or C1-5 alkyl substituted with a Ci-6 alkyl, Ci-6 alkoxy, di(Ci_6 alkyl)-amino, fluoro, C3-10 cycloalkyl, or C3-10 cycloalkyl alkyl; and R is H, CH3, CH2CH3, CH(CH3)2, CH2CH(CH3)2, CH(CH3)CH2CH3, CH2Ph, CH2- indol-3-yl, -CH2CH2SCH3, CH2C02H, CH2C(0) H2, CH2CH2COOH, CH2CH2C(0) H2, CH2CH2CH2CH2 H2, CH2CH2CH2 HC(NH) H2, CH2-imidazol-4-yl, CH2OH, CH(OH)CH3, CH2((4'-OH)-Ph), CH2SH, or C3-6 cycloalkyl, or one of the Formulas (XXV) or (XXVI):
Figure imgf000123_0001
(XXV) (XXVI) wherein:
R , R , R , R , Y, R , R R'4 and R'5 are as defined above.
28. The method of any of Claims 1-27, wherein the compounds are described herein can be in the form of the β-L- or β-D-configuration, or a mixture thereof, including a racemic mixture thereof.
29. The compound of any of Claims 1-27, wherein when the phosphorous portion of the compound described herein contains a chiral center, such chiral center can be in the form of the Rp- or ^-configuration or a mixture thereof, including a racemic mixture thereof.
30. The method of Claim 1, wherein the compound is sulfasalazine, Ipsalazide and Balsalazine, or a sulfasalazine analog of the formula:
Figure imgf000123_0002
wherein
X is pyridyl, pheny, phenyl- substituted by lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, halogi roxy, or nitro, furyl, pyrrolyl, quinolyl, pyrimidyl, thienyl or imidazolyl; R, Ri and R2 are independently H, Ci_6 alkyl, Ci_6 aminoalkyl or
Figure imgf000124_0001
A is H, Ci-6 alkyl, Ci_6 aminoalkyl, amino, alkoxy, halo or CF3; and n is 0 to 4, wherein the term pyridyl means 2-pyridyl, 3-pyridyl and 4-pyridyl; halo is chloro, bromo, iodo, or fluoro; and amino is - H2, ~ H~C( H2)~ H or
— N— C = NCH = CHCH = N
31. The method of Claim 30, wherein the compound is sulfasalazine.
32. The method of Claim 1, wherein the compound is chloroquine, hydroxychloroquine, amodiaquine, Quinacrine; 7-hydroxy-4-(4-diethylamino-l- methylbutylamino)quinoline; chloroquine phosphate; 7-chloro-4-(4-diethylamino-l- butylamino)quinoline (desmethylchloroquine) ; 7 -hydroxy-4-(4-diethylamino- 1 - butylamino)quinoline; 7-chloro-4-(l-carboxy-4-diethylamino-l-butylamino)quinoline; 7- hydroxy-4-(l-carboxy-4-diethylamino-l-butylamino)quinoline; 7-chloro-4-(l-carboxy-4- diethylamino- 1 -methylbutylamino)quinoline; 7-hydroxy-4-( 1 -carboxy-4-diethylamino- 1 - methylbutylamino)quinoline; 7-hydroxy-4-(4-ethyl-(2-hydroxyethyl)-amino- 1 - methylbutylamino)quinoline; hydroxychloroquine phosphate; 7-chloro-4-(4-ethyl-(2- hydroxyethyl)-amino- 1 -butylamino)quinoline (desmethylhydroxychloroquine); 7-hydroxy-4-
(4-ethyl-(2-hydroxyethyl)-amino-l-butylamino)quinoline; 7-chloro-4-(l-carboxy-4-ethyl-(2- hydroxyethyl)-amino-l-butylamino)quinoline; 7-hydroxy-4-(l-carboxy-4-ethyl-(2- hydroxyethyl)-amino-l-butylamino)quinoline; 7-chloro-4-(l-carboxy-4-ethyl-(2- hydroxyethyl)-amino-l-methylbutylamino)quinoline; 7-hydroxy-4-(l-carboxy-4-ethyl-(2- hydroxyethyl)-amino-l-methylbutylamino)quinoline; 8-[(4-aminopentyl)amino]-6- methoxydihydrochloride quinoline; 1 -acetyl- 1, 2,3, 4-tetrahydroquinoline; 8-[4- aminopentyl)amino]-6-methoxyquinoline dihydrochloride; 1-butyryl-l, 2,3,4- tetrahydroquinoline; 7-chloro-2-(o-chlorostyryl)-4-[4-diethylamino-l- methylbutyl]aminoquiinoline phosphate; 3-chloro-4-(4-hydroxy-a,a'-bis(2-methyl-l- pyrrolidinyl)-2, 5 -xyl idinoquinoline, 4-[(4-diethylamino)-l-methylbutyl)amino]-6- methoxyquinoline; 3,4-dihydro-l (2H)-quinolinecarboxyaldehyde; 1, 1'- pentamethylenediquinoleinium diiodide; or 8-quinolinol sulfate.
33. The method of Claim 32, wherein the compound is chloroquine, hydroxychloroquine, or amodiaquine.
34. The method of Claim 1, wherein the compound is administered in combination with a second anti-Zika agent.
35. The method of Claim 34, wherein the second anti-Zika agent is BCX4430, an entry inhibitor, a reverse transcriptase inhibitor, a protease inhibitor, or an immune-based therapeutic agent.
36. The method of Claim 35, wherein the entry inhibitor is
Figure imgf000125_0001
PCT/US2017/023537 2016-03-23 2017-03-22 Antiviral agents for treating zika and dengue virus infections Ceased WO2017165489A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US16/088,017 US11963972B2 (en) 2016-03-23 2017-03-22 Antiviral agents and nucleoside analogs for treatment of Zika virus
US18/603,143 US20240216414A1 (en) 2016-03-23 2024-03-12 Antiviral Agents and Nucleoside Analogs for Treatment of Zika Virus

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201662312225P 2016-03-23 2016-03-23
US62/312,225 2016-03-23

Related Child Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US16/088,017 A-371-Of-International US11963972B2 (en) 2016-03-23 2017-03-22 Antiviral agents and nucleoside analogs for treatment of Zika virus
US18/603,143 Continuation US20240216414A1 (en) 2016-03-23 2024-03-12 Antiviral Agents and Nucleoside Analogs for Treatment of Zika Virus

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2017165489A1 true WO2017165489A1 (en) 2017-09-28

Family

ID=59900862

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2017/023537 Ceased WO2017165489A1 (en) 2016-03-23 2017-03-22 Antiviral agents for treating zika and dengue virus infections

Country Status (2)

Country Link
US (2) US11963972B2 (en)
WO (1) WO2017165489A1 (en)

Cited By (35)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US10160969B2 (en) 2014-01-16 2018-12-25 Wave Life Sciences Ltd. Chiral design
US10167309B2 (en) 2012-07-13 2019-01-01 Wave Life Sciences Ltd. Asymmetric auxiliary group
US10280192B2 (en) 2011-07-19 2019-05-07 Wave Life Sciences Ltd. Methods for the synthesis of functionalized nucleic acids
US10307434B2 (en) 2009-07-06 2019-06-04 Wave Life Sciences Ltd. Nucleic acid prodrugs and methods of use thereof
WO2019113462A1 (en) * 2017-12-07 2019-06-13 Emory University N4-hydroxycytidine and derivatives and anti-viral uses related thereto
US10329318B2 (en) 2008-12-02 2019-06-25 Wave Life Sciences Ltd. Method for the synthesis of phosphorus atom modified nucleic acids
US10428019B2 (en) 2010-09-24 2019-10-01 Wave Life Sciences Ltd. Chiral auxiliaries
WO2020121123A2 (en) 2018-12-12 2020-06-18 Janssen Biopharma, Inc. Cyclopentyl nucleoside analogs as anti-virals
WO2020154917A1 (en) * 2019-01-29 2020-08-06 Minghui Pharmaceutical (Shanghai) Limited Phosphate and phosphonate based compounds of 6-thio-2'-deoxyguanosine as anti-cancer agents
WO2020255978A1 (en) 2019-06-18 2020-12-24 大鵬薬品工業株式会社 Novel phosphate ester compound having pyrrolopyrimidine skeleton or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof
CN115181148A (en) * 2022-07-12 2022-10-14 南京工业大学 Compound with anti-tumor effect based on cordycepin through derivatization
CN115215914A (en) * 2021-04-15 2022-10-21 中国科学院上海药物研究所 Nucleoside analogs and their uses
GB2611644A (en) * 2018-03-07 2023-04-12 Univ Emory 4'-halogen containing nucleotide and nucleoside therapeutic compositions and uses related thereto
US11628181B2 (en) 2014-12-26 2023-04-18 Emory University N4-hydroxycytidine and derivatives and anti-viral uses related thereto
US11660307B2 (en) 2020-01-27 2023-05-30 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Methods for treating SARS CoV-2 infections
US11697666B2 (en) 2021-04-16 2023-07-11 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Methods of preparing carbanucleosides using amides
US11701372B2 (en) 2020-04-06 2023-07-18 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Inhalation formulations of 1'-cyano substituted carba-nucleoside analogs
US11767337B2 (en) 2020-02-18 2023-09-26 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Antiviral compounds
US11773122B2 (en) 2020-08-24 2023-10-03 Gilead Sciences. Inc. Phospholipid compounds and uses thereof
US11780844B2 (en) 2022-03-02 2023-10-10 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Compounds and methods for treatment of viral infections
US11787833B2 (en) 2019-05-09 2023-10-17 Aligos Therapeutics, Inc. Modified cyclic dinucleoside compounds as sting modulators
US11814406B2 (en) 2020-08-27 2023-11-14 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Compounds and methods for treatment of viral infections
US11865132B2 (en) 2021-12-16 2024-01-09 Ascletis Bioscience Co., Ltd. Nucleoside derivatives and methods of use thereof
US11903953B2 (en) 2020-05-29 2024-02-20 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Remdesivir treatment methods
US11939347B2 (en) 2020-06-24 2024-03-26 Gilead Sciences, Inc. 1′-cyano nucleoside analogs and uses thereof
US11963967B2 (en) 2020-10-16 2024-04-23 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Phospholipid compounds and uses thereof
US11975017B2 (en) 2017-07-11 2024-05-07 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Compositions comprising an RNA polymerase inhibitor and cyclodextrin for treating viral infections
US12012431B2 (en) 2020-03-12 2024-06-18 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Methods of preparing 1′-cyano nucleosides
US12030906B2 (en) 2017-05-01 2024-07-09 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Crystalline forms of (s)-2-ethylbutyl 2-(((s)-(((2r,3s,4r,5r)-5-(4-aminopyrrolo[2,1-f] [1,2,4]triazin-7-yl)-5-cyano-3,4-dihydroxytetrahydrofuran-2-yl)methoxy) (phenoxy) phosphoryl)amino)propanoate
US12030903B2 (en) 2020-02-18 2024-07-09 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Antiviral compounds
US12054507B2 (en) 2020-02-18 2024-08-06 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Antiviral compounds
US12116380B2 (en) 2021-08-18 2024-10-15 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Phospholipid compounds and methods of making and using the same
US12215123B2 (en) 2022-07-12 2025-02-04 Nanjing Tech University Cordycepin-based derivatized compound with anti-tumor effect
US12357577B1 (en) 2024-02-02 2025-07-15 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Pharmaceutical formulations and uses thereof
US12509466B2 (en) 2010-07-22 2025-12-30 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Methods and compounds for treating paramyxoviridae virus infections

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20120189614A1 (en) * 2009-07-10 2012-07-26 Crobiotix, Inc. Inhibitors of filovirus entry into host cells
WO2012142523A2 (en) * 2011-04-13 2012-10-18 Gilead Sciences, Inc. 1'-substituted pyrimidine n-nucleoside analogs for antiviral treatment
US20140065101A1 (en) * 2012-08-31 2014-03-06 Novartis Ag 2'-Branched Nucleosides for Treatment of Viral Infections

Family Cites Families (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2004013298A2 (en) 2002-08-01 2004-02-12 Pharmasset Ltd. 2',3'-dideoxynucleoside analogues for the treatment or prevention of flavivitridae infections
US20100279969A1 (en) 2007-05-14 2010-11-04 Rfs Pharma, Llc Azido purine nucleosides for treatment of viral infections
WO2010068708A2 (en) 2008-12-09 2010-06-17 Rfs Pharma, Llc 3'-azido purine nucleotide prodrugs for treatment of viral infections
EP2393815A4 (en) 2009-02-06 2012-11-21 Rfs Pharma Llc NUCLEOSIDE MONOPHOSPHATE PURINE PRODRUGS FOR THE TREATMENT OF CANCER AND VIRAL INFECTIONS
CA2836579A1 (en) 2011-05-19 2012-11-22 Rfs Pharma, Llc Purine monophosphate prodrugs for treatment of viral infections
HK1214270A1 (en) 2012-10-29 2016-07-22 共晶制药股份有限公司 Pyrimidine nucleotides and their monophosphate prodrugs for treatment of viral infections and cancer
CN107108683A (en) 2014-10-31 2017-08-29 共晶制药股份有限公司 2 ' for treating flaviviridae and cancer, 2 ' dihalo nucleoside analogs
CA3000951A1 (en) 2015-10-20 2017-04-27 Emory University Response-guided hcv therapy
CO2018009382A2 (en) 2016-03-09 2018-09-20 Univ Emory Elimination of hepatitis B virus with antiviral agents

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20120189614A1 (en) * 2009-07-10 2012-07-26 Crobiotix, Inc. Inhibitors of filovirus entry into host cells
WO2012142523A2 (en) * 2011-04-13 2012-10-18 Gilead Sciences, Inc. 1'-substituted pyrimidine n-nucleoside analogs for antiviral treatment
US20140065101A1 (en) * 2012-08-31 2014-03-06 Novartis Ag 2'-Branched Nucleosides for Treatment of Viral Infections

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
EKINS SEAN ET AL.: "Open drug discovery for the Zika virus [version 1; referees: 3 approved", F1000RESEARCH 2016, vol. 5, no. 150, 9 February 2016 (2016-02-09), pages 3 , 4, XP055276503 *

Cited By (60)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US10329318B2 (en) 2008-12-02 2019-06-25 Wave Life Sciences Ltd. Method for the synthesis of phosphorus atom modified nucleic acids
US10307434B2 (en) 2009-07-06 2019-06-04 Wave Life Sciences Ltd. Nucleic acid prodrugs and methods of use thereof
US12509466B2 (en) 2010-07-22 2025-12-30 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Methods and compounds for treating paramyxoviridae virus infections
US10428019B2 (en) 2010-09-24 2019-10-01 Wave Life Sciences Ltd. Chiral auxiliaries
US10280192B2 (en) 2011-07-19 2019-05-07 Wave Life Sciences Ltd. Methods for the synthesis of functionalized nucleic acids
US10167309B2 (en) 2012-07-13 2019-01-01 Wave Life Sciences Ltd. Asymmetric auxiliary group
US10160969B2 (en) 2014-01-16 2018-12-25 Wave Life Sciences Ltd. Chiral design
US11628181B2 (en) 2014-12-26 2023-04-18 Emory University N4-hydroxycytidine and derivatives and anti-viral uses related thereto
US12551497B2 (en) 2014-12-26 2026-02-17 Emory University N4-hydroxycytidine and derivatives and anti-viral uses related thereto
US12030906B2 (en) 2017-05-01 2024-07-09 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Crystalline forms of (s)-2-ethylbutyl 2-(((s)-(((2r,3s,4r,5r)-5-(4-aminopyrrolo[2,1-f] [1,2,4]triazin-7-yl)-5-cyano-3,4-dihydroxytetrahydrofuran-2-yl)methoxy) (phenoxy) phosphoryl)amino)propanoate
US11975017B2 (en) 2017-07-11 2024-05-07 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Compositions comprising an RNA polymerase inhibitor and cyclodextrin for treating viral infections
GB2581936A (en) * 2017-12-07 2020-09-02 Univ Emory N4-hydroxycytidine and derivatives and anti-viral uses related thereto
GB2581936B (en) * 2017-12-07 2021-02-10 Univ Emory N4-hydroxycytidine and derivatives and anti-viral uses related thereto
GB2590198A (en) * 2017-12-07 2021-06-23 Univ Emory N4-hydroxycytidine and derivatives and anti-viral uses related thereto
GB2590198B (en) * 2017-12-07 2022-02-23 Univ Emory N4-hydroxycytidine derivatives and anti-viral uses related thereto
US11331331B2 (en) 2017-12-07 2022-05-17 Emory University N4-hydroxycytidine and derivatives and anti-viral uses related thereto
US12329770B2 (en) 2017-12-07 2025-06-17 Emory University N4-hydroxycytidine and derivatives and anti-viral uses related thereto
CN111372592A (en) * 2017-12-07 2020-07-03 埃默里大学 N4-Hydroxycytidine and its derivatives and their related antiviral uses
US11903959B2 (en) 2017-12-07 2024-02-20 Emory University N4-hydroxycytidine and derivatives and anti-viral uses related thereto
WO2019113462A1 (en) * 2017-12-07 2019-06-13 Emory University N4-hydroxycytidine and derivatives and anti-viral uses related thereto
GB2611644B (en) * 2018-03-07 2023-07-26 Univ Emory 4'-halogen containing nucleotide and nucleoside therapeutic compositions and uses related thereto
GB2611644A (en) * 2018-03-07 2023-04-12 Univ Emory 4'-halogen containing nucleotide and nucleoside therapeutic compositions and uses related thereto
GB2589205B (en) * 2018-03-07 2023-05-24 Univ Emory 4'-halogen containing nucleotide and nucleoside therapeutic compositions and uses related thereto
WO2020121123A2 (en) 2018-12-12 2020-06-18 Janssen Biopharma, Inc. Cyclopentyl nucleoside analogs as anti-virals
WO2020154917A1 (en) * 2019-01-29 2020-08-06 Minghui Pharmaceutical (Shanghai) Limited Phosphate and phosphonate based compounds of 6-thio-2'-deoxyguanosine as anti-cancer agents
US11787833B2 (en) 2019-05-09 2023-10-17 Aligos Therapeutics, Inc. Modified cyclic dinucleoside compounds as sting modulators
KR20220012349A (en) 2019-06-18 2022-02-03 다이호야쿠힌고교 가부시키가이샤 A novel phosphate ester compound having a pyrrolopyrimidine skeleton or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof
WO2020255978A1 (en) 2019-06-18 2020-12-24 大鵬薬品工業株式会社 Novel phosphate ester compound having pyrrolopyrimidine skeleton or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof
US11660307B2 (en) 2020-01-27 2023-05-30 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Methods for treating SARS CoV-2 infections
US12030903B2 (en) 2020-02-18 2024-07-09 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Antiviral compounds
US12264173B2 (en) 2020-02-18 2025-04-01 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Antiviral compounds
US12054507B2 (en) 2020-02-18 2024-08-06 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Antiviral compounds
US11767337B2 (en) 2020-02-18 2023-09-26 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Antiviral compounds
US12012431B2 (en) 2020-03-12 2024-06-18 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Methods of preparing 1′-cyano nucleosides
US11701372B2 (en) 2020-04-06 2023-07-18 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Inhalation formulations of 1'-cyano substituted carba-nucleoside analogs
US11975012B2 (en) 2020-05-29 2024-05-07 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Remdesivir treatment methods
US11903953B2 (en) 2020-05-29 2024-02-20 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Remdesivir treatment methods
US11939347B2 (en) 2020-06-24 2024-03-26 Gilead Sciences, Inc. 1′-cyano nucleoside analogs and uses thereof
US12404289B2 (en) 2020-06-24 2025-09-02 Gilead Sciences, Inc. 1′-cyano nucleoside analogs and uses thereof
US12473314B2 (en) 2020-08-24 2025-11-18 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Phospholipid compounds and uses thereof
US11773122B2 (en) 2020-08-24 2023-10-03 Gilead Sciences. Inc. Phospholipid compounds and uses thereof
US12030904B2 (en) 2020-08-24 2024-07-09 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Phospholipid compounds and uses thereof
US12297226B2 (en) 2020-08-27 2025-05-13 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Compounds and methods for treatment of viral infections
US11926645B2 (en) 2020-08-27 2024-03-12 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Compounds and methods for treatment of viral infections
US11814406B2 (en) 2020-08-27 2023-11-14 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Compounds and methods for treatment of viral infections
US11963967B2 (en) 2020-10-16 2024-04-23 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Phospholipid compounds and uses thereof
US12208110B2 (en) 2020-10-16 2025-01-28 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Phospholipid compounds and uses thereof
CN115215914B (en) * 2021-04-15 2024-05-28 中国科学院上海药物研究所 Nucleoside analogs and their uses
CN115215914A (en) * 2021-04-15 2022-10-21 中国科学院上海药物研究所 Nucleoside analogs and their uses
US11697666B2 (en) 2021-04-16 2023-07-11 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Methods of preparing carbanucleosides using amides
US12116380B2 (en) 2021-08-18 2024-10-15 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Phospholipid compounds and methods of making and using the same
US11865132B2 (en) 2021-12-16 2024-01-09 Ascletis Bioscience Co., Ltd. Nucleoside derivatives and methods of use thereof
US12448383B2 (en) 2022-03-02 2025-10-21 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Compounds and methods for treatment of viral infections
US11845755B2 (en) 2022-03-02 2023-12-19 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Compounds and methods for treatment of viral infections
US12180217B2 (en) 2022-03-02 2024-12-31 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Compounds and methods for treatment of viral infections
US11851438B2 (en) 2022-03-02 2023-12-26 Gilead Sciences, Inc. 1′-cyano nucleoside analogs and methods for treatment of viral infections
US11780844B2 (en) 2022-03-02 2023-10-10 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Compounds and methods for treatment of viral infections
US12215123B2 (en) 2022-07-12 2025-02-04 Nanjing Tech University Cordycepin-based derivatized compound with anti-tumor effect
CN115181148A (en) * 2022-07-12 2022-10-14 南京工业大学 Compound with anti-tumor effect based on cordycepin through derivatization
US12357577B1 (en) 2024-02-02 2025-07-15 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Pharmaceutical formulations and uses thereof

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US11963972B2 (en) 2024-04-23
US20230000893A1 (en) 2023-01-05
US20240216414A1 (en) 2024-07-04

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20240216414A1 (en) Antiviral Agents and Nucleoside Analogs for Treatment of Zika Virus
US12239655B2 (en) Combined modalities for nucleosides and/or NADPH oxidase (NOX) inhibitors as myeloid-specific antiviral agents
US20240238323A1 (en) Modified nucleosides and nucleotides analogs as antiviral agents for corona and other viruses
CA2751458C (en) Purine nucleoside monophosphate prodrugs for treatment of cancer and viral infections
CA2984421C (en) Nucleoside analogs for treatment of the flaviviridae family of viruses and cancer
TWI333956B (en) Modified fluorinated nucleoside analogues and the preparation and uses thereof
CA2946867C (en) 2&#39;-disubstituted nucleoside analogs for treatment of the flaviviridae family of viruses and cancer
CN104884462A (en) Pyrimidine nucleotides and their monophosphate prodrugs for treatment of viral infections and cancer
WO2016069975A1 (en) 2&#39;,2&#39;-dihalo nucleoside analogs for treatment of the flaviviridae family of viruses and cancer
WO2012078416A2 (en) Monophosphate prodrugs of dapd and analogs thereof

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 17771036

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 17771036

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1